Chapter 1

Units and Measurement

1.1 Introduction
Measurement of any physical quantity involves comparison with a certain
basic, internationally accepted reference standard called unit.
The result of a measurement of a physical quantity is expressed by a
number accompanied by a unit.

Fundamental and Derived Quantities.

The quantities ,which can be measured directly or indirectly are called
physical quantities. There are two types of physical quantities-
Fundamental quantities(Base quantities) and Derived quantities.

▪ The physical quantities, which are independent of each other and

cannot be expressed in terms of other physical quantities are called
fundamental quantities.
Eg: length, mass, time.
▪ The physical quantities , which can be expressed in terms of
fundamental quantities are called derived quantities.
Eg: volume, velocity, force

Fundamental and Derived Units

▪ The units for the fundamental or base quantities are called
fundamental or base units. The units of all other physical quantities
can be expressed as combinations of the base units.
▪ The units of the derived quantities are called derived units.
1.2 The International System of Units
A complete set of both the base and derived units, is known as the system
of units. Three such systems, the CGS, the FPS (or British) system and the
MKS system were in use extensively till recently.
The base units for length, mass and time in these systems were as follows :
▪ CGS system - centimetre, gram and second.
▪ FPS system - foot, pound and second.
▪ MKS system - metre, kilogram and second.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Seema Elizabeth, HSST Physics, MARM Govt HSS Santhipuram
 ▪ In 1971 the General Conference on Weights and Measures
developed an internationally accepted system of units for
measurement with standard scheme of symbols, units and
abbreviations.
▪ This is the Système Internationale d’ Unites (French for International
System of Units), abbreviated as SI system.
▪ SI system is now for international usage in scientific, technical,
industrial and commercial work.
In SI system there are seven base units and two supplementary units.
Multiples and Sub multiples of Units

1.3 Significant figures

The result of measurement is a number that includes all digits in the
number that are non reliable plus the first digit that is uncertain.
The reliable digits plus the first uncertain digit in a measurement are
known as significant digits or significant figures.
If the period of oscillation of a symbol pendulum is 1.6 s, the digits 1 and 6
are reliable and certain, while the digit 2 is uncertain
Rule 6: The power of 10, in scientific notation is irrelevant to the
determination of significant figures.
 4.700 m
= 4.700 × 𝟏𝟎𝟐 cm
= 4.700 × 𝟏𝟎𝟑 mm
= 4.700 × 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 km
All these numbers have 4 significant namaste figures.

Rounding off the Uncertain Digits

1) If the insignificant digit to be dropped is more than 5, the preceding
digit is raised by 1
A number 2.746 rounded off to three significant figures is 2.75
Here the insignificant digit , 6 > 5 and hence 1 is added to the
preceeding digit 4 .(4+1=5)

2) If the insignificant digit to be dropped less than 5, the preceding digit

is left unchanged .
A number 2.743 rounded off to three significant figures is
be 2.74.
Here the insignificant digit , 3< 5 and hence the preceeding
number 4 does not change.

3) If the insignificant digit to be dropped is 5,

Case i) If the preceding digit is even, the insignificant digit is simply
dropped.
A number 2.745 rounded off to three significant figures is 2.74.
Here the preceding digit 4 is even and hence 5 is simply dropped.

Case ii- ) If the preceding digit is odd, the preceding digit is raised by 1.
A number 2.735 rounded off to three significant figures is 2.74
Here the preceding digit 3 ,is odd and hence 1 is added to
It. (3+1=4)

Rules for Arithmetic Operations with Significant Figures

(1)In multiplication or division, the final result should retain as many
significant figures as are there in the original number with the least
significant figures.
Eg:If mass of an object is measured to be, 4.237 g (four significant figures)
and its volume is measured to be 2.51cm3(3 significant figures), then find
its density in appropriate significant figures.
𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑠 4.237 𝑔
Density = = = 1.688047
𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 2.51𝑐𝑚3
As per rule the final result should be rounded to 3 significant figures .
So the answer is 1.69 g/ 𝒄𝒎𝟑

(2) In addition or subtraction, the final result should retain as many

decimal places as are there in the number with the least decimal places.
Eg:Find the sum of the numbers 436.32 g, 227.2 g and 0.301 g to
appropriate significant figures.
436.32 g + (2 decimal places)
227.2 g + (1 decimal place)
0.301 g (3 decimal places)
______________
663.821 g
As per rule ,the final result should be rounded to 1 decimal place.
So the answer 663.8 g
1.4 Dimensions of Physical Quantities
The nature of a physical quantity is described by its dimensions. All the
physical quantities represented by derived units can be expressed in terms
of some combination of seven fundamental or base quantities. This base
quantities are known as seven dimensions of physical world ,which are
denoted with square brackets [ ]. Thus, length has the dimension [L], mass
[M], time [T], electric current [A], thermodynamic temperature K],
luminous intensity [cd] and amount of substance [mol].
The dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers (or exponents) to
which the base quantities are raised to represent that quantity.
Eg: The volume occupied by an object= lengthx breadth x thickness
The dimensions of volume is represented as [V]
Thus volume has zero dimension in mass, zero dimension in time and
three dimensions in length.
1.5 Dimensional Formulae and Dimensional Equations

Unit of density =kg 𝒎−𝟑

1.6 Dimensional Analysis and its Applications
1. Checking the dimensional consistency (correctness) of equatons.
2. Deducing relation among the physical quantities.
Since dimensions of all terms are the same for Equations (b) and (d) ,
these equations can be considered as the equation for kinetic energy.

9.The Van der waals equation of 'n' moles of a real gas is

𝒂
(P+ 𝟐 )(V−b)=nRT. Where P is the pressure, V is the volume, T is absolute
𝑽
temperature, R is molar gas constant and a, b, c are Van der
waal constants. Find the dimensional formula for a and b.
a
(P+ 2 )(V−b)=nRT.
V
By principle of homegeneity, the quantities with same dimensions can be
added or subtracted.
a
[P] =[ 2 ]
V
[a] =[PV 2 ]
=ML−1 T −2 x L6
[a] = M𝐋𝟓 𝐓 −𝟐

[b] = [V]
[b] =𝐋𝟑
 Chapter 2
Motion in a Straight Line
Introduction
The study of motion of objects along a straight line is also known as
rectilinear motion .
Average Velocity and Average Speed
Average Velocity
Average velocity is defined as the ratio of total displacement to the total time interval.
𝐓𝐨𝐭𝐚𝐥 𝐝𝐢𝐬𝐩𝐥𝐚𝐜𝐞𝐦𝐞𝐧𝐭
Average velocity=
𝐓𝐨𝐭𝐚𝐥 𝐭𝐢𝐦𝐞 𝐢𝐧𝐭𝐞𝐫𝐯𝐚𝐥
𝐱 𝟐 −𝐱 𝟏 ∆𝐱
𝐯̅ = =
𝐭 𝟐 −𝐭 𝟏 ∆𝐭
where x1 and x2 are the positions of the object at time t1 and t2
Average speed
Average speed is defined as the ratio of total path length (distance travelled) to the
total time interval.
𝐓𝐨𝐭𝐚𝐥 𝐩𝐚𝐭𝐡 𝐥𝐞𝐧𝐠𝐭𝐡
Average speed=
𝐓𝐨𝐭𝐚𝐥 𝐭𝐢𝐦𝐞 𝐢𝐧𝐭𝐞𝐫𝐯𝐚𝐥

Uniform motion
If an object moving along the straight line covers equal distances in equal intervals of
time, it is said to be in uniform motion along a straight line .
In uniform motion velocity of the object remains constant.

2.2 Instantaneous Velocity and Speed

Instantaneous velocity
The average velocity tells us how fast an object has been moving over a
given time interval but does not tell us how fast it moves at different
instants of time during that interval. For this, we define instantaneous
velocity or simply velocity v at an instant t.
The velocity at an instant is called instantaneous velocity and is defined as
the limit of the average velocity as the time interval Δt becomes
infinitesimally small
𝚫𝐱 𝐝𝐱
v = 𝐥𝐢𝐦 =
𝚫𝐭→𝟎 𝚫𝐭 𝐝𝐭
𝐝𝐱
v = 𝐝𝐭
dx
is the differential coefficient of x with respect to t .It is the rate of
dt
change of position with respect to time.
Determining velocity from position-time graph. Velocity at t = 4 s is the
slope of the tangent to the graph at that instant.

We see from Table 2.1 that as we decrease the value of ∆t from 2.0 s to
0.010 s, the value of the average velocity approaches the limiting value
𝐝𝐱
3.84 m s–1 which is the value of velocity at t = 4.0 s, i.e. the value of
𝐝𝐭

at t = 4.0 s.

Instantaneous speed
Instantaneous speed or simply speed is the magnitude of velocity.
For example, a velocity of 24 m s –1 and a velocity of – 24 m s –1 — both
have an associated speed of 24.0 m s -1 .
Example
The position of an object moving along x-axis is given by x = a + bt2 where
a = 8.5 m, b = 2.5 m s–2 and t is measured in seconds.
(a)What is its velocity at t = 0 s and t = 2.0 s.
(b) What is the average velocity between t = 2.0 s and t = 4.0 s ?

(a) x = a + bt 2
𝐝𝐱 𝐝
v= = (a + bt 2 ) = 2bt
𝐝𝐭 𝐝𝐭
At t = 0 , v = 0
At t = 2 , v = 2 x 2.5 x 2 = 10 m s-1

x2 −x1 x4 −x2
(b) v̅ = =
t2 −t1 4−2
a+16b−a−4b
=
2
12b 12 x 2.5
= = =15 m s-1
2 2

2.3 Acceleration
Suppose the velocity itself is changing with time. In order to describe its
effect on the motion of the particle, we require another physical quantity
called acceleration. The rate of change of velocity of an object is called
acceleration.
Average Acceleration
The average acceleration a over a time interval is defined as the change of
velocity divided by the time interval .
𝐯𝟐 −𝐯𝟏 ∆𝐯
𝐚̅ = =
𝐭 𝟐 −𝐭 𝟏 ∆𝐭

▪ Unit of acceleration is ms-2 , [a] =LT-2

▪ Acceleration is a vector quantity.
▪ If velocity is increasing with time, acceleration is +ve.
▪ If velocity is decreasing with time, acceleration is -ve.
▪ -ve acceleration is called retardation or deceleration.
Uniform acceleration
If the velocity of an object changes by equal amounts in equal intervals of
time, it has uniform acceleration.
Instantaneous acceleration
The acceleration of a particle at any instant of its motion is called
instantaneous acceleration. It is defined as the limit of the average
acceleration as the time interval Δt becomes infinitesimally small.
𝚫𝐯 𝐝𝐯
a = 𝐥𝐢𝐦 = 𝐝𝐭
𝚫𝐭→𝟎 𝚫𝐭
𝐝𝐯
a = 𝐝𝐭
ⅆ𝟐 𝒙
or a = ⅆ𝒕𝟐
Position-time graph for motion with
(a)positive acceleration (b) negative acceleration c)zero acceleration

Velocity–time graph for motions with constant acceleration

(a)Motion in positive direction with positive acceleration

(b) Motion in positive direction with negative acceleration

(c)Motion in negative direction with negative acceleration

(d)Motion of an object with negative acceleration that changes direction at

time t1.
(Between times 0 to t1, its moves in positive x - direction and between t1 and t2 it
moves in the opposite direction.)

Importance of Velocity - time graph for a moving object

An interesting feature of velocity - time graph for any moving object is that
the area under the velocity - time graph is equal to the displacement of the
particle.

Proof for this statement :-

In uniform motion, velocity is the same at any instant of motion. Therefore,
the velocity - time graph is a straight line parallel to the time axis.

Area =uT = Displacement

i.e.,the area under the velocity - time graph is equal to the displacement of
the particle.
2.4 Kinematic Equations for Uniformly Accelerated Motion
Consider a body moving with uniform acceleration . The velocity – time
graph is as shown in figure

(1) Velocity – time relation

From the graph , acceleration = slope
BC
a=
AC
v−u
a=
t
v-u = at
v = u +at -------------------- (1)
or (v = v0 +at)
(2) Position-time relation
Displacement = Area under the graph
s = Area of + Area of
s = ut + ½ (v-u) t
But from equation (1)
v -u = at
s = ut + ½ at x t
s = ut + ½ at2 ------------------(2)
or (s=v0 t +½ at2)

(3)Position – velocity relation

Displacement = Average velocity x time
v+u v−u
s=( )( )
2 a
v2 −u2
s=( )
2a
v 2 − u2 = 2as
𝐯 𝟐 = 𝐮𝟐 + 2as ----------------(3)
Or (𝐯 𝟐 = 𝐯𝟎 𝟐 + 2as )
Stopping distance of vehicles
When brakes are applied to a moving vehicle, the distance it travels before
stopping is called stopping distance.
𝑣 2 = 𝑢2 + 2as
0 = 𝑢2 + 2as
−𝑢2 = 2as
−𝒖𝟐
s= 𝟐𝒂

Motion of an object under Free Fall

Free fall is a case of motion with uniform acceleration.
Since the acceleration due to gravity is always downward, a=–g =–9.8ms–2
The object is released from rest at y = 0. Therefore, u = 0
Then the equations of motion become
v=0–gt = -9.8 t
y = 0 – ½ g t2 = -4.9 t2
v 2 = 0 – 2 g y = -19.6 y
(a)Variation of acceleration with time

(b)Variation of velocity with time

(c)Variation of distance with time

Example
A ball is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity of 20 m s–1 from the top
of a multistorey building. The height of the point from where the ball is
thrown is 25.0 m from the ground.
(a) How high will the ball rise ? and
(b) how long will it be before the ball hits the ground? Take g = 10 m s–2

Example
Galileo’s law of odd numbers :“The distances traversed, during equal
intervals of time, by a body falling from rest, stand to one another in the
same ratio as the odd numbers beginning with unity [namely, 1: 3: 5:
7…...].” Prove it.
Answer: Let us divide the time interval of motion of an object under free
fall into many equal intervals τ and find out the distances traversed during
successive intervals of time. Since initial velocity is zero, we have
y = - ½ g t2

We find that the distances are in the simple ratio 1: 3: 5: 7: 9: 11… as

shown in the last column. This law was established by Galileo Galilei.
 Chapter 3
Motion in a Plane
3.1 Introduction
In one dimension only two directions are possible and we used
positive and negative signs to represent the two directions. But in order to
describe motion of an object in two dimensions (plane) or three
dimensions (space) we need to use vectors to describe physical quantities
like position, displacement, velocity ,acceleration etc
Scalars and Vectors
A scalar quantity has only magnitude and no direction. It is specified
completely by a single number, along with the proper unit.
Eg. distance ,mass , temperature, time .

A vector quantity has both magnitude and direction and obeys the
triangle law of addition or the parallelogram law of addition. A vector is
specified by giving its magnitude by a number and its direction.
Eg.displacement, velocity, acceleration and force.

Representation of a Vector
A vector is representedby a bold letter say A or an arrow by an arrow
placed over a letter, say Ā .
The magnitude of a vector is called its absolute value, indicated by
|Ā|=A
Graphically a vector is represented by a line segment with an arrow head.
Q Q is the head of the vector
Ā P is the tail of the vector

The length of line segment gives the magnitude of the vector and arrow
mark gives its direction.
Position and Displacement Vectors
Let P and P′ be the positions of the object at time t and t′ , respectively .
OP is the position vector of the object at time t. OP = r.
OP’ is the position vector of the object at time t’. OP’= r’
If the object moves from P to P′ , the vector PP′ is called the displacement
vector.
Displacement vector is the straight line joining the initial and final
positions and does not depend on the actual path undertaken by the object
between the two positions.

Equality of Vectors
Two vectors A and B are said to be equal if, and only if, they have the
same magnitude and the same direction.
(a) Two equal vectors A and B.

(b) Two vectors A ′ and B ′ are unequal eventhough they are of same
length

3.3 Multiplication of Vectors by Real Numbers

▪ Multiplying a vector Ā with a positive number λ gives a vector whose
magnitude is changed by the factor λ but direction is the same as that
of Ā
λxĀ =λĀ, if λ > 0

For example, if Ā is multiplied by 2, the resultant vector 2 Ā is in

the same direction as Ā and has a magnitude twice of | Ā
 ▪ Multiplying a vector Ā by a negative number λ gives a vector λ Ā
whose direction is opposite to the direction of Ā and whose
magnitude is
–λ times | Ā |.
For example, multiplying a given vector A by negative numbers, say
–1 and –1.5, gives vectors as

3.4 Addition and Subtraction of Vectors — Graphical Method

Triangle law of vector addition

If two vectors are represented in magnitude and

direction by the two sides of a triangle taken in order ,then their resultant
is given by the third side of the triangle taken in reverse order.
This graphical method is called the head-to-tail method.
If we find the resultant of B + A , the same vector R is obtained.
▪ Thus, vector addition is commutative:
A+B=B+A
▪ The addition of vectors also obeys the associative law
(A + B) + C = A + (B + C)

Subtraction of vectors
Subtraction of vectors can be defined in terms of addition of vectors. We
define the difference of two vectors A and B as the sum of two vectors
A and –B :
A – B = A + (–B)
Parallelogram law of vector addition
If two vectors are represented in magnitude and direction by the
adjacent sides of a parallelogram ,then their resultant is given by the
diagonal of the parallelogram.

Example
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 35 m s –1 . Winds starts blowing
after sometime with a speed of 12 m s –1 in east to west direction. In which
direction
should a boy waiting at a bus stop hold his umbrella ?

Unit vectors
A unit vector is a vector of unit magnitude and points in a particular
direction.
It has no dimension and unit. It is used to specify a direction only.
If we multiply a unit vector, say n by a scalar, the result is a vector.
In general, a vector A can be written as
Ā =|𝐴̅|𝐴̂
̅
̂= 𝐀
𝐀 ̅|
|𝑨
where  is the unit vector along Ā

Unit vectors along the x-, y- and z-axes of a rectangular coordinate system
are denoted by î , ĵ and k̂ , respectively.

Since these are unit vectors, we have | î | = | ̂J | = | k̂ | = 1

These unit vectors are perpendicular to each other and are called
orthogonal unit vectors

3.5 Resolution of a vector

We can now resolve a vector A in terms of component vectors that lie along
unit vectors î and ĵ .
3.6 Vector Addition – Analytical Method
Consider two vectors A and B in x-y plane
From the geometry of the figure,
OS 2 = ON 2 + SN 2
but ON = OP + PN
= A + B cos θ
SN = B sin θ
OS 2 = (A + B cos θ ) 2 + (B sin θ ) 2
R 2 = A 2 +2AB cos θ + B 2 cos 2θ +B 2sin2 θ
R 2 = A 2 + B 2 + 2AB cos θ
𝐑 = √𝐀2 + 𝐁 2 + 2𝐀𝐁𝐜𝐨𝐬𝛉
This Equation gives the magnitude of the resultant of vectors A and B.
From figure,

These Equations gives the direction of the resultant of vectors A and B.

Example
A motorboat is racing towards north at 25 km/h and the water current
in that region is 10 km/h in the direction of 60° east of south. Find the
resultant velocity of the boat
3.7 Motion in a Plane

Position Vector
The position vector r of a particle P at time t
r = xî +y ĵ
The position vector r of a particle P at time t’
r’ = x’î +y’ ĵ
Displacement vector
Δr = r’ -r
Δr =( x’î +y’ ĵ ) - (xî +y ĵ )
Δr = ( x’- x) î + (y’ - y ) ĵ
Δr = Δx î + Δy ĵ

Velocity vector
Δ𝐫
v=
Δ𝐭
v = Δx î + Δy ĵ
Δt
v = Δx î + Δy ĵ
Δt Δt
v = vx î + v y ĵ
Instantaneous velocity
𝐝𝐫
v = 𝐝𝐭
v = vx î + vy ĵ where

Acceleration

a = ax î + a y ĵ

Instantaneous Acceleration
𝐝𝐯
a=
𝐝𝐭
3.9 Projectile Motion

▪ An object that is in flight after being thrown or projected is called a

projectile.
▪ The path (trajectory)of a projectile is a parabola.
▪ The components of initial velocity u are u cos θ along horizontal
direction and u sin θ along vertical direction.
 ▪ The x-component of velocity(u cos θ ) remains constant throughout
the motion and hence there is no acceleration in horizontal
direction,i.e., ax = 0
▪ The y- component of velocity (u sin θ ) changes throughout the
motion. At the point of maximum height, u sin θ = 0. There is
acceleration in vertical direction, ay = – g

Equation of path of a projectile

Displacement of the projectile after a time t
x= ucosθ t
x
t =ucosθ
1
y= u sinθ t − g t 2
2
x 1 x 2
y= u sinθ (ucosθ) − 2 g (ucosθ)
g
y= tanθ x − x2
2 u2 cos2 θ
This equation is of the form y = a x + b x 2 , in which a and b are constants.
This is the equation of a parabola, i.e. the path of the projectile is a
parabola .
Time of Flight of a projectile (T)

The total time T during which the projectile is in flight is called Time of
Flight, T.
Consider the motion in vertical direction,
s = ut +½ at2
s=0,
u = u sin θ ,
a =-g ,
t=T
0 = u sin θ T - ½ gT2
u sin θ T = ½ gT2
𝟐 𝐮 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉
T=
𝐠
Horizontal range of a projectile (R)
The horizontal distance travelled by a projectile during its time of flight is
called the horizontal range, R.
Horizontal range = Horizontal component of velocity x Time of flight
𝟐 𝐮 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉
R = u cos θ x 𝒈
𝒖𝟐 𝐱 𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧𝛉 cos θ
R= 𝑔
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝛉
R=
𝐠
R is maximum when sin2θ is maximum, i.e., when θ = 45 0 .
𝐮𝟐
Rmax =
𝐠

Show that for a given velocity of projection range will be same for angles 𝜽
and ( 90-𝜽 )
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝛉
For angle θ, R=
𝐠
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐(𝟗𝟎−𝛉)
For angle (90 -θ), R=
𝐠
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 (𝟏𝟖𝟎− 𝟐𝛉)
R=
𝐠
sin (180 - 2θ) =sin 2θ
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝛉
R=
𝐠
for given velocity of projection range will be same for angles 𝜽 and ( 90-𝜽 )
Maximum height of a projectile (H)
It is the maximum height reached by the projectile.
Consider the motion in vertical direction to the highest point
v2 – u2 = 2as
u = u sin θ,
v=0,
a = -g ,
s=H
0 - u2 sin 2θ = -2 g H
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧𝟐 𝛉
H=
𝟐𝐠

Example
A cricket ball is thrown at a speed of 28 m s –1 in a direction 30° above the
horizontal. Calculate (a) the maximum height, (b) the time taken by the
ball to return to the same level, and (c) the distance from the thrower to
the point where the ball returns to the same level.
u2 sin2 θ
(a) H =
2g
282 sin2 30
H= = 10 m
2 x 9.8
2 u sin θ
(b) T =
g
2x9.8 sin 30
T= = 2.9 s
9.8
u2 sin 2θ
(c) R =
g

282 sin 60
R= = 69 m
9.8

3.10 Uniform Circular Motion

When an object follows a circular path at a constant speed, the motion of
the object is called uniform circular motion. The word “uniform” refers to
the speed, which is uniform (constant) throughout the motion.

Period
The time taken by an object to make one revolution is known as its time
period T
Frequency
The number of revolutions made in one second is called its frequency.
𝟏
υ=
𝑻
unit - hertz (Hz)
Angular velocity (ω )
angular velocity is the time rate of change of angular displacement
𝚫𝛉
ω=
𝚫𝒕

In the limit Δt tends to zero

𝐝𝛉
ω=
ⅆ𝒕
Unit is rad/s
During the time period T ,the angular displacement is 2π radian
2𝛑
ω= or ω = 2𝛑 υ
𝑻

Relation connecting angular velocity and linear velocity

As the object moves from P to P′ in time Δt . Δθ is called angular

displacement and Δ r is the linear diplacement
arc
angle =
radius
Δr
Δθ=
r
Δr=r Δθ
Δr Δθ
=r
Δ𝑡 Δ𝑡
v=rω
Angular Acceleration
The rate of change of angular velocity is called angular acceleration.
d𝛚
α =
dt
dθ
But ω =
𝑑𝑡
d dθ
α= ( 𝑑𝑡 )
dt

𝐝𝟐 𝛉
α= 𝐝𝐭
Centripetal acceleration
A body in uniform circular motion experiences an acceleration , which is
directed towards the centre along its radius .This is s called centripetal
acceleration .

Let r and r′ be the position vectors and v and v′ the velocities of the object
when it is at point P and P ′
Δv Δr
=
v r
vΔr
Δv=
r
Δv vΔr
=
Δt r Δt
v
a= xv
r
v2
a= r
If R is the radius of circular path, then centripetal acceleration .
𝐯𝟐
ac = 𝐑
Centripetal acceleration can also be expressed as

v=Rω v=Rω
𝐯𝟐
ac = R = v/ω
𝐑
v2
ac =
R
ac = R2 ω2 ac = v 2
R (v/ ω)
a c = ω 2R ac = v ω

Example
An insect trapped in a circular groove of radius 12 cm moves along the
groove steadily and completes 7 revolutions in 100 s.

(a) What is the angular speed, and the linear speed of the motion?
(b) Is the acceleration vector a constant vector ? What is its magnitude ?
100
Period, T= s
7

(a) The angular speed ω is given by

2π 2π 2π x7
ω= = 100 = =0.44 rad/s
𝑇 100
7

The linear speed , v =ω R = 0.44 × 0.12 = 5.3 x 10 -2 m s -1

(b) The direction of velocity v is along the tangent to the circle at every
point. The acceleration is directed towards the centre of the circle. Since
this direction changes continuously, acceleration here is not a constant
vector.
a = ω 2 R = (0.44 ) 2 x0.12 = 2.3x10 -2 m s -2
 Chapter 4
Laws of Motion
Galileo’s Law of Inertia
If the net external force is zero, a body at rest continues to remain at rest
and a body in motion continues to move with a uniform velocity.
This property of the body is called inertia.Inertia means ‘resistance to
change’.
Suppose a person is standing in a stationary bus and the driver starts the
bus suddenly. He gets thrown backward with a jerk. This is due to his
inertia of rest.

Similarly if a person is standing in a moving bus and if the bus suddenly

stops he is thrown forward. This is due to his inertia of motion.
Newton’s Laws of Motion
Newton built on Galileo’s ideas and laid the foundation of mechanics in
terms of three laws of motion. Galileo’s law of inertia was his starting point
on which he formulated as the First Law of motion.

Newton’s First Law of Motion (Law of inertia)

Every body continues to be in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a
straight line unless compelled by some external force to change that state.

The state of rest or uniform linear motion both imply zero acceleration. If
the net external force on a body is zero, its acceleration is zero.
Acceleration can be non zero only if there is a net external force on the
body.

Momentum
Momentum, P of a body is defined to be the product of its mass m and
velocity v, and is denoted by p.
p=mv
Momentum is a vector quantity.
Unit = kgm/s

[p] = ML T −1
 ▪ Suppose a light-weight vehicle car) and a heavy weight vehicle are
parked on a horizontal road. A greater force is needed to push the
truck than the car to bring them to the sam e speed in same time.
Similarly, a greater opposing force is needed to stop a heavy body
than a light body in the same time, if they are moving with the same
speed.
▪ Speed is another important parameter to consider. A bullet fired by a
gun can easily pierce human tissue before it stops, resulting in
casualty. The same bullet fired with moderate speed will not cause
much damage.Thus for a given mass, the greater the speed, the
greater is the opposing force needed to stop the body in a certain
time.
Newton’s Second Law f Motion
The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the
applied force and takes place in the direction in which the force acts.
∆𝐩
F∝
∆𝐭
∆p
F =k
∆t
For simplicity we choose k=1
In the limit ∆t →0
𝐝𝐩
F=
𝐝𝐭

Why a cricketer draws his hands backwards during a catch?

By Newton's second law of motion ,
∆𝐩
F=
∆𝐭
When he draws his hands backwards, the time interval (∆t) to stop the
ball increases . Then force decreases and it does not hurt his hands.
Force not only depends on the change in momentum but also on how fast
the change is brought about.
Derivation of Equation of force from Newton's second law of
motion
By Newton's second law of motion ,

For a body of ixed mass m, p=mv

= mv
dt

F = ma
Force is a vector quantity
Unit of force is kgm ( )

Definition of newton

One newton is that which causes an acceleration of m s-2 to a mass

of 1kg

Important points about second law

1.The second Law is consistent with the first law.

Zero acceleration implies the state of rest or uniform linear motion . i.e,
when there is no external force , the body will remain in its state of rest or
of uniform motion in a straight line. This is Newtons first law of motion.
3. If a force makes some angle with velocity, the force changes only the
component of velocity along the direction of force.

4. For a system of particles we can write

𝐅𝐧𝐞𝐭 = 𝐦𝐚
𝐅𝐧𝐞𝐭 refers to the total external force on the system and a refers to the
acceleration of the system as a whole.

5. In equation F=ma
Acceleration at any instant is determined by the force at that instant ,
not by any history of the motion of the particle.

Example
A bullet of mass 0.04 kg moving with a speed of 90 m/s enters a heavy
wooden block and is stopped after a distance of 60 cm. What is the average
resistive force exerted by the block on the bullet?
Example

Impulse (I)
There are some situations where a large force acts for a very short
duration producing a finite change in momentum of the body. For example,
when a ball hits a wall and bounces back, the force on the ball by the wall
acts for a very short time when the two are in contact, yet the force is large
enough to reverse the momentum of the ball.

Impulse is the the product of force and time duration, which is the change
in momentum of the body.
Impulse = Force × time duration
I=Fxt
Unit = kg m s−1
[I] =M L T −1
Impulsive force.
A large force acting for a short time to produce a finite change in
momentum is called an impulsive force.

Impulse momentum Principle

Impulse is equal to the change in momentum of the body.
By Newton's second law of motion,
dp
F=
dt
F x dt = dp
I = dp
Impulse = change in momentum

Example
A batsman hits back a ball straight in the direction of the bowler without
changing its initial speed of 12 m s −1 . If the mass of the ball is 0.15 kg,
determine the impulse imparted to the ball.
Impulse = change of momentum
Change in momentum = final momentum – initial momentum
Change in momentum = 0.15 × 12–(0.15×-12)
Impulse = 3.6 N s

Newton’s Third Law of Motion

To every action, there is always an equal and opposite reaction.

Important points about Third law

1. Forces always occur in pairs. Force on a body A by B is equal and
opposite to the force on the body B by A.

2. There is no cause- effect relation implied in the third law. The force on A
by B and the force on B by A act at the same instant. By the same
reasoning, any one of them may be called action and the other reaction.
3. Action and reaction forces act on different bodies, not on the same body.
So they do not cancel each other , eventhough they are equal and opposite.
According to the third law,
FAB = – FBA (force on A by B) = – (force on B by A)
4. However, if you are considering the system of two bodies as a
whole, FAB and FBA are internal forces of the system (A + B). They add
up to give a null force.
Weight of a body in a lift
Weight of a body is the normal reaction exerted by the surface in contact
with that body.
Example
A man of mass 70 kg stands on a weighing scale in a lift which is moving,
(a) upwards with a uniform speed of 10 m 𝐬 −𝟏
(b) downwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 m 𝐬−𝟐
(c) upwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 m 𝐬−𝟐
What would be the readings on the scale in each case?
(d) What would be the reading if the lift mechanism failed and it falls
down freely under gravity? Take g=10 m 𝐬−𝟐
(a)When lift moves with uniform speed , a=0
R= mg = 70 x 10=700 N
Reading= 700/ 10= 70 kg
(b)Acceleration a = 5m s-2 downwards
R= m(g-a) =70 ( 10-5)= 70x5= 350N
Reading = 350/ 10 = 35 kg
(c) Acceleration a = 5m s-2 upwards
R= m(g+a) = 70(10+5) = 70x 15= 1050N
Reading = 1050/ 10 = 105 kg
(d) when lift falls freely a=g
R= m(g-g) = 0
Reading = 0

Law of Conservation of Momentum

The total momentum of an isolated system of interacting particles is
conserved.
Or
When there is no external force acting on a system of particles ,their total
momentum remains constant.

Proof of law of conservation of momentum

dp
By Newton's second law of motion , F=
dt

When F = 0
dp
=0
dt

dp = 0 ,
p=constant
Thus when there is no external force acting on a system of particles, their
total momentum remains constant.
Applications of law of conservation of linear momentum
1.Recoil of gun
When a bullet is fired from a gun , the backward movement of gun is called
recoil of the gun.

If 𝐩𝐛 and 𝐩𝐠 are the momenta of the bullet and gun after firing
𝐩𝐛 + 𝐩𝐠 = 0
𝐩𝐛 = - 𝐩𝐠
The negative sign shows that the gun recoils to conserve momentum.

Expression for Recoil velocity and muzzle velocity

Momentum of bullet after firing , 𝐩𝐛 = 𝐦𝐯
Recoil momentum of the gun after firing , 𝐩𝐠 = 𝐌𝐕
𝐩𝐛 = - 𝐩𝐠
𝐦𝐯 = −𝐌𝐕
−𝐦𝐯
Recoil velocity of gun , V=
𝐌

−𝐌𝐕
Muzzle velocity of bullet , v=
𝐦
M= mass of gun, V= recoil velocity of bullet
m= mass of bullet, v=muzzle velocity of bullet

2. The collision of two bodies

Total Final momentum = Total initial momentum
i.e. , the total final momentum of the isolated system equals its total initial
momentum.

Equilibrium of a particle
Equilibrium of a particle in mechanics refers to the situation when the net
external force on the particle is zero.
According to the first law, this means that, the particle is either at rest or in
uniform motion.
If a number of forces 𝐅𝟏 , 𝐅𝟐 ,……..𝐅𝐧 , act on a particle
𝐅𝟏 + 𝐅𝟐 + … … … . . . +𝐅𝐧 = 𝟎

Example
A mass of 6 kg is suspended by a rope of length 2 m from the ceiling. A
force of 50 N in the horizontal direction is applied at the midpoint P of the
rope, as shown. What is the angle the rope makes with the vertical in
equilibrium ? (Take g = 10 m 𝐬−𝟐 ).

Neglect the mass of the rope.

Common Forces in Mechanics
There are two types of forces in mechanics- Contact forces and Non
contact forces.
Contact forces
A contact force on an object arises due to contact with some other object:
solid or fluid.
Eg: Frictional force, viscous force, air resistance
Non contact forces
A non contact force can act at a distance without the need of any
intervening medium.
Eg: Gravitational force.

Friction
The force that opposes (impending or actual) relative motion between two
surfaces in contact is called frictional force.

There are two types of friction-Static and Kinetic friction

Static friction 𝐟𝐬

▪ Static friction is the frictional force that acts between two surfaces in
contact before the actual relative motion starts. Or Static friction fs
opposes impending relative motion.
The maximum value of static friction is ( fs )max
▪ The limiting value of static friction ( fs )max , is independent of the
area of contact.
▪ The limiting value of static friction ( fs )max , varies with the normal
force(N)
( fs )max αN
( 𝐟𝐬 )𝐦𝐚𝐱 = 𝛍𝐬 𝐍
Where the constant 𝛍𝐬 is called the coefficient of static friction and
depends only on the nature of the surfaces in contact.

The Law of Static Friction

The law of static friction may thus be written as , fs ≤ 𝛍𝐬 𝐍
0r
( 𝐟𝐬 )𝐦𝐚𝐱 = 𝛍𝐬 𝐍
Note:
If the applied force F exceeds ( fs )max , the body begins to slide on the
surface. When relative motion has started, the frictional force decreases
from the static maximum value ( fs )max
Kinetic friction 𝐟𝐤

Frictional force that opposes (actual) relative motion between surfaces in

contact is called kinetic or sliding friction and is denoted by fk . .

▪ Kinetic friction is independent of the area of contact.

▪ Kinetic friction is nearly independent of the velocity.
▪ Kinetic friction , fk varies with the normal force(N)
fk αN
𝐟𝐤 = 𝛍𝐤 𝐍
where μk the coefficient of kinetic friction, depends only on the surfaces in
contact.
μk is less than μs

The Law of Kinetic Friction

The law of kinetic friction can be written as , 𝐟𝐤 = 𝛍𝐤 𝐍
where μk the coefficient of kinetic friction,
Example
Body on an inclined surface

The forces acting on a block of mass m When it just begins to slide are
(i) the weight mg
(ii) the normal force N
(iii) the maximum static frictional force ( 𝐟𝐬 )𝐦𝐚𝐱

In equilibrium, the resultant of these forces must be zero.

m g sin θ = ( fs )max
But ( fs )max = μs N
mg sin θ = μs N------------(1)
m g cos θ = N-------------(2)
(1) mg sin θ μs N
Eqn(2) -------- =
m g cos θ N
𝛍𝐬 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝛉
𝛉 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧−𝟏 𝛍𝐬
This angle whose tangent gives the coefficient of friction is called
angle of friction.

μs = tan θ
θ = 15°,
μs = tan 15° = 0.27
Applying second law to motion of the block
30 – T = 3a ---------------(1)
Apply the second law to motion of the trolley
T – fk = 20 a ------------(2)
Nowfk = μk N,
Here μk = 0.04, N = 20 x 10 = 200 N.
Substituting in eq(2)
T – 0.04 x 200 = 20 a
T – 8 = 20a-------------(3)

Solving eqns (1) and (3)

22
a= m s −2 = 0.96 m s−2
23
T = 27.1 N
Rolling Friction
It is the frictional force that acts between the surfaces in contact when one
body rolls over the other.

Rolling friction is much smaller than static or sliding friction

Disadvantages of friction
friction is undesirable in many situations, like in a machine with different
moving parts, friction opposes relative motion and thereby dissipates
power in the form of heat, etc.
Advantages of friction
Friction is a necessary evil .In many practical situations friction is critically
needed. Kinetic friction is made use of by brakes in machines and
automobiles. We are able to walk because of static friction. It is impossible
for a car to move on a very slippery road. On an ordinary road, the friction
between the tyres and the road provides the necessary external force to
accelerate the car.

Methods to reduce friction

(1)Lubricants are a way of reducing kinetic friction in a machine.
(2)Another way is to use ball bearings between two moving parts of a
machine.
(3) A thin cushion of air maintained between solid surfaces in relative
motion is another effective way of reducing friction.

Circular Motion
The acceleration of a body moving in a circular path is directed towards
the centre and is called centripetal acceleration.
𝐯𝟐
a= 𝐑
The force f providing centripetal acceleration is called the centripetal force
and is directed towards the centre of the circle.
𝐦𝐯 𝟐
𝐟𝐬 = 𝐑
where m is the mass of the body, R is the radius of circle.
For a stone rotated in a circle by a string, the centripetal force is provided
by the tension in the string.

The centripetal force for motion of a planet around the sun is the
gravitational force on the planet due to the sun.
Motion of a car on a curved level road
Three forces act on the car.
(i) The weight of the car, mg
(ii) Normal reaction, N
(iii) Frictional force, fs

As there is no acceleration in the vertical direction

N= mg
The static friction provides the centripetal acceleration
mv2
fs =
R
But , fs ≤ μs N
mv2
≤ μs mg (N=mg)
R
𝟐
𝐯 ≤ 𝛍𝐬 𝐑𝐠
𝐯𝐦𝐚𝐱 = √𝛍𝐬 𝐑𝐠
This is the maximum safe speed of the car on a circular level road.

Example
A cyclist speeding at 18 km/h on a level road takes a sharp circular turn of
radius 3 m without reducing the speed. The co-efficient of static friction
between the tyres and the road is 0.1. Will the cyclist slip while taking the
turn ?
v 2 ≤ μs R g
R = 3 m, g = 9.8 m s −2 , μs = 0.1.

μs R g = 2.94 m2 s−2

v 2 ≤ 2.94 m2 s −2
Here v = 18 km/h = 5 m s−1
i.e., v 2 = 25 m2 s −2

The condition is not obeyed. The cyclist will slip while taking the circular
turn.
Motion of a car on a banked road
Raising the outer edge of a curved road above the inner edge is called
banking of curved roads.

Since there is no acceleration along the vertical direction, the net force
along this direction must be zero.
N cos θ = mg +f sin θ
N cos θ - f sin θ = mg --------------(1)
The centripetal force is provided by the horizontal components of N andfs .
mv2
N sin θ + f cos θ = -------------(2)
R
Eqn(1) N cos θ − f sin θ mg
----- = mv2
Eqn(2) N sin θ + f cos θ
R
Dividing throughout by N cos θ
f
1 −N tan θ Rg
f =
tan θ + N v2
f
But , = μs for maximum speed
N
1 −μs tan θ Rg
=
tan θ + μs v2
Rg(μs +tan θ )
v2 =
1 −μs tan θ
𝐑𝐠(𝛍𝐬 +𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝛉 )
𝐯𝐦𝐚𝐱 = √
𝟏 −𝛍𝐬 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝛉
This is the maximum safe speed of a vehicle on a banked Curved road.

If friction is absent, μs = 0
Then Optimum speed, 𝐯𝐨𝐩𝐭𝐢𝐦𝐮𝐦 = √𝐑𝐠 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝛉
Example
A circular racetrack of ra dius 300 m is banked at an angle of 15°. If the
coefficient of friction between the wheels of a race-car and the road is 0.2,
what is the
(a) optimum speed of the racecar to avoid wear and tear on its tyres, and
(b) maximum permissible speed to avoid slipping ?
 Chapter 5
Work ,Energy and Power

The Scalar Product or Dot Product

The scalar product or dot product of any two vectors ⃗A and ⃗B, denoted as
⃗A.B
⃗
(read A dot B) is defined as
𝐀⃗ ⋅ ⃗𝐁
⃗ = 𝐀𝐁 𝐜𝐨𝐬𝛉
where θ is the angle between the two vectors

Since A, B and cos θ are scalars, the dot product of A and B is a scalar
quantity. Each vector, A and B, has a direction but their scalar product does
not have a direction.

⃗ ⋅B
A ⃗ = A(B cosθ )
⃗A ⋅ ⃗B = magnitude of Ax projection of B onto A

⃗A ⋅ ⃗B = (Acosθ )B
⃗A ⋅ ⃗B = magnitude of Bx projection of Aonto B

Properties of scalar product

▪ The scalar product follows the commutative law
⃗A ⋅ ⃗B = ⃗B. ⃗A
▪ Scalar product obeys the distributive law
⃗ ⋅ (B
A ⃗ +C ⃗ )=A ⃗ ⋅B ⃗ +A ⃗ .C
⃗
⃗A . (λ ⃗B) = λ ( ⃗A ⋅ ⃗B) where λ is a real number.
▪ For unit vectors 𝑖̂, 𝑗̂, 𝑘̂ we have
𝒊̂ ⋅ 𝒊̂ = 𝒋̂ ⋅ 𝒋̂ = 𝒌̂⋅𝒌 ̂=1
̂=𝒌
𝒊̂ ⋅ 𝒋̂ = 𝒋̂ ⋅ 𝒌 ̂ ⋅ 𝒊̂ = 0
▪ For two vectors A ̅ = Ax î+ Ay ĵ + Az k̂
̅ = Bx î+ By ĵ + Bz k̂
B
 ⃗A ⋅ ⃗B =(Ax î+ Ay ĵ + Az k̂) . (Bx î+ By ĵ + Bz k̂)
⃗ ⋅ ⃗𝐁
𝐀 ⃗ = 𝐀 𝐱 𝐁 𝐱 + 𝐀 𝐲 𝐁 𝐲 + 𝐀 𝐳 𝐁𝐳
▪ ⃗A ⋅ ⃗A = Ax Ax + Ay Ay + Az Az
⃗A ⋅ ⃗A = Ax 2 + Ay 2 + Az 2 = A2

▪ ⃗A ⋅ ⃗A = A A cos 0 = A2

▪ If ⃗A and ⃗B are perpendicular

⃗A ⋅ ⃗B = A B cos 90 = 0

Example
Find the angle between force ⃗F = (3î+ 4ĵ - 5k̂) unit and displacement
⃗d = (5î+ 4ĵ + 3k̂) unit. Also find the projection of F on d.
⃗F. ⃗d = 𝐹𝑑𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃
⃗
⃗F.d
cosθ = ----------(1)
Fd

⃗F. ⃗d = 𝐹𝑥 𝑑𝑥 + 𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑦 + 𝐹𝑧 𝑑𝑧
= (3x5 )+ (4x4 ) + (-5 x3)
𝐅. 𝐝 = 16 unit

F =√Fx 2 + Fy 2 + Fz 2 =√32 + 42 + (−5)2

= √9 + 16 + 25
F = √50 unit

d =√dx 2 + dy 2 + dz 2 =√52 + 42 + 32
= √25 + 16 + 9
d = √50unit

Substituting the values in eq(1)

16 16
cos𝜃 = = = 0.32
√50 √50 50
𝜽 = 𝐜𝐨𝐬 −1 0.32
The projection of F on d = F cosθ=√50 x 0.32 =2.26
Work
Consider a constant force F acting on an object of mass m. The object
undergoes a displacement d in the positive x-direction

The work done by the force is defined to be the product of component of

the force in the direction of the displacement and the magnitude of this
displacement.
W = (F cos θ )d
W = F d cos θ
W = ⃗⃗⃗
𝐅 ⋅𝐝
Work can be zero, positive or negative.
Zero Work
The work can be zero,if
(i)the displacement is zero .
When you push hard against a rigid brick wall, the force you exert
on the wall does no work.
A weightlifter holding a 150 kg mass steadily on his shoulder for
30 s does no work on the load during this time.
(ii) the force is zero.
A block moving on a smooth horizontal table is not acted upon by a
horizontal force (since there is no friction), but may undergo a large
displacement.
(iii) the force and displacement are mutually perpendicular
Here θ = 90 o , cos (90) = 0.
For the block moving on a smooth horizontal table, the
gravitational force mg does no work since it acts at right angles to
the displacement.

Positive Work
If θ is between 0 o and 90 o , cos θ is positive and work positive.
Eg: Workdone by Gravitational force on a freely falling body is positive
Negative work
If θ is between 90 o and 180 o , cos θ is negative and work negative.
Eg: the frictional force opposes displacement and θ = 180 o .
Then the work done by friction is negative (cos 180 o = –1).
Units of Work and Energy
▪ Work and Energy are scalar quantities.
▪ Work and energy have the same dimensions, [ML 2 T –2 ].
▪ The SI unit is kgm2s-2 or joule (J), named after the famous British
physicist James Prescott Joule.

Alternative Units of Work/Energy in J

Example

Work done by a Variable Force

If the displacement Δx is small, we can take the force F (x) as

approximately constant and the work done is then
ΔW =F(x) Δx
 x2
W = ∫ F(x) Δx
x1
In the limit Δx tends to zero
𝐱𝟐
W = ∫ 𝐅(𝐱) 𝐝𝐱
𝐱𝟏
Kinetic Energy
The kinetic energy is the energy possessed by a body by virtue of its
motion.

If an object of mass m has velocity v, its kinetic energy K is

𝟏 𝟏
K = 𝐦𝐯̅ ⋅ 𝐯̅ = 𝐦𝐯 𝟐
𝟐 𝟐
Kinetic energy is a scalar quantity.

Example
In a ballistics demonstration a police officer fires a bullet of mass 50.0 g
with speed 200 m s-1 on soft plywood of thickness 2.00 cm. The bullet
emerges with only 10% of its initial kinetic energy. What is the emergent
speed of the bullet ?

The Work-Energy Theorem

The work-energy theorem can be stated as :The change in kinetic energy
of a particle is equal to the work done on it by the net force.

Proof
For uniformly accelerated motion
v 2 − u 2 = 2 as
1
Multiplying both sides by 𝑚, we have
2
1 1
mv − mu2 = mas = Fs
2
2 2
Kf -Ki = W
Change in KE = Work
Potential Energy
Potential energy is the ‘stored energy’ by virtue of the position or
configuration of a body.
▪ A body at a height h above the surface of earth possesses potential
energy due to its position.
▪ A Stretched or compressed spring possesses potential energy due to
its state of strain.
Gravitational potential energy of a body of mass m at a height h above the
surface of earth is mgh.
Gravitational Potential Energy , V =mgh

Show that gravitational potential energy of the object at height h,

is equal to the kinetic energy of the object on reaching the ground,
when the object is released.

PE at a height h, V = mgh----------(1)
When the object is released from a height it gains KE
K = ½ mv 2
v 2 = u2 + 2as
u=0, a=g , s=h
2
v = 2gh
K = ½ m x 2gh
K= mgh----------(2)
From eq(1) and (2)
Kinetic energy= Potential energy

Conservative Force
A force is said to be conservative, if it can be derived from a scalar quantity.
− dV
F= where V is a scalar
dx
Eg: Gravitational force, Spring force.
▪ The work done by a conservative force depends only upon initial and
final positions of the body
▪ The work done by a conservative force in a cyclic process is zero
Note: Frictional force , air resistance are non conservative forces.

The Conservation of Mechanical Energy

The principle of conservation of total mechanical energy can be stated as,
The total mechanical energy of a system is conserved if the forces, doing
work on it, are conservative.
Conservation of Mechanical Energy for a Freely Falling Body
Consider a body of mass m falling freely from a height h
At Point A
PE = mgh
KE = 0 (since v=0)
TE = PE + KE
= mgh + 0
TE = mgh-----------(1)

At Point B
PE = mg (h-x)
KE = ½ mv 2
v 2 = u2 + 2as
u=0, a=g , s= x
2
v = 2gx
KE = ½ m x 2gx
KE= mgx
TE = PE + KE
TE = mg (h-x) + mgx
TE = mgh--------------(2)

At Po int C
PE = 0 (Since h=0)
KE = ½ mv 2
v 2 = u2 + 2as
u=0, a=g , s= h
2
v =2gh
KE = ½ m x 2gh
KE= mgh
TE = PE + KE
TE = 0 + mgh
TE = mgh--------------(3)
From eqns (1), (2) and (3), it is clear that the total mechanical energy is
conserved during the free fall.
Graphical variation of KE and PE with height from ground
Hooke’s Law
Hooke’s law states that ,for an ideal spring, the spring force F is
proportional displacement x of the block from the equilibrium position.
F = − kx
The displacement could be either positive or negative.
The constant k is called the spring constant. Its unit is N𝑚−1
The spring is said to be stiff if k is large and soft if k is small.

The Potential Energy of a Spring

Consider a block of mass m attached to a spring and resting on a smooth

horizontal surface. The other end of the spring is attached to a rigid wall.
Let the spring be pulled through a distance x.
Then the spring force F = − kx

The work done by the spring force is

x
W = ∫0 F dx
x
W = − ∫0 kx dx
1
W = − kx 2
2

This work is stored as potential energy of spring

𝟏
𝐏𝐄 = 𝐤𝐱 𝟐
𝟐

Conservation of Mechanical Energy of an Oscillating Spring

Consider a spring oscillating between −𝑥𝑚 and 𝑥𝑚 .

At any point x between −𝑥𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑥𝑚 , the total mechanical energy of the
spring
TE = PE +KE
1 1 1
k𝐱 𝐦 2 = kx 2 + mv 2
2 2 2
At equilibrium position x=0,
1 1
k𝐱 𝐦 2 = mv 2
2 2
k
v=√ xm
m
▪ At equilibrium position PE is zero and KE is max.
▪ At extreme ends, the PE is maximum and KE is zero.
▪ The kinetic energy gets converted to potential energy and vice versa,
however, the total mechanical energy remains constant.

Graphical variation of kinetic Energy and potential of a spring

Power
Power is defined as the time rate at which work is done or energy is
transferred.
The average power of a force is defined as the ratio of the work, W, to the
total time t taken.
𝐖
𝐏𝐚𝐯 =
𝐭
The instantaneous power
The instantaneous power is defined as the limiting value of the average
power as time interval approaches zero.
𝐝𝐖
P=
𝐝𝐭
The work done, dW = F. dr.
dr
P=F.
dt
P= F . v
where v is the instantaneous velocity when the force is F.
▪ Power, like work and energy, is a scalar quantity.
▪ Its dimensions are ML2 T −3 .
 ▪ SI unit of power is called a watt (W). 1W = 1 J/s
▪ The unit of power is named after James Watt.
▪ Another unit of power is the horse-power (hp)
1 hp = 746 W
This unit is still used to describe the output of automobiles,
motorbikes, etc

kilowatt hour
Electrical energy is measured in kilowatt hour (kWh).
1kWh = 3.6 × 𝟏𝟎𝟔 J

Note:
A 100 watt bulb which is on for 10 hours uses 1 kilowatt hour (kWh) of
energy.
Energy = Power x Time
=100 (watt) × 10 (hour)
= 1000 watt hour =
=1 kilowatt hour (kWh)
= 103 (W) × 3600 (s)
= 3.6 × 106 J
Problem
An elevator can carry a maximum load of 1800 kg (elevator + passengers)
is moving up with a constant speed of 2 m s–1. The frictional force
opposing the motion is 4000 N. Determine the minimum power delivered
by the motor to the elevator in watts as well as in horse power.
The downward force on the elevator is F = m g + Frictional Force
= (1800 × 10) + 4000
= 22000 N
Power, P = F. v
= 22000 × 2
= 44000 W
In horse power, power = 44000/746
=59 hp

Collisions
In all collisions the total linear momentum is conserved; the initial
momentum of the system is equal to the final momentum of the system.
There are two types of collisions Elastic and Inelastic.
Elastic Collisions
The collisions in which both linear momentum and kinetic energy are
conserved are called elastic collisions.
Eg: Collision between sub atomic particles

Inelastic Collisions
The collisions in which linear momentum is conserved, but kinetic
energy is not conserved are called inelastic collisions. . Part of the initial
kinetic energy is transformed into other forms of energy such as
heat,sound etc..
Eg: Collision between macroscopic objects
A collision in which the two particles move together after the collision is a
perfectly inelastic collision.

Elastic Collisions in One Dimension

If the initial velocities and final velocities of both the bodies are along the
same straight line, then it is called a one-dimensional collision, or head-on
collision.

Consider two masses m1 and m2 making elastic collision in one dimension.

By the conservation of momentum

m1 u1 + m2 u2 = m1 v1 + m2 v2 --------------(1)
m1 u1 − m1 v1 = m2 v2 − m2 u2
m1 (u1 − v1 ) = m2 (v2 − u2 )----------------(2)
By the conservation of kinetic energy
1 1 1 1
m1 u12 + m2 u22 = m1 v12 + m2 v22 -----------(3)
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
m1 u12 − m1 v12 = m2 v22 − m2 u22
2 2 2 2
1 1
m1 (u12 − v12 ) = m2 (v22 − u22 )
2 2

m1 (u12 − v12 ) = m2 (v22 − u22 ) -------------(4)

(4) m1 (u21 −v21 ) m2 (v22 −u22 )
Eqn ------------ =
(2) m1 (u1 −v1 ) m2 (v2 −u2 )
 (u1 +v1 ) (u1 −v1 ) (v2 +u2 )(v2 −u2 )
=
(u1 −v1 ) (v2 −u2 )

u1 + v1 = v2 + u2 -------------(5)
𝐮1 − 𝐮2 = −(𝐯1 − 𝐯2 )--------(6)
i.e., relative velocity before collision is numerically equal to relative
velocity after collision.

From eqn(5), v2 = u1 + v1 − u2
Substituting in eqn (1)
m1 u1 + m2 u2 = m1 v1 + m2 (u1 + v1 − u2 )
m1 u1 + m2 u2 = m1 v1 + m2 u1 + m2 v1 − m2 u2
m1 u1 + m2 u2 − m2 u1 + m2 u2 = m1 v1 + m2 v1
(m1 − m2 )u1 + 2m2 u2 = (m1 + m2 )v1
(𝐦1 −𝐦2 )𝐮1 2𝐦2 𝐮2
𝐯1 = + -------- (7)
𝐦1 +𝐦2 𝐦1 +𝐦2
(𝐦2 −𝐦1 )𝐮2 2𝐦1 𝐮1
Similarly, 𝐯2 = + ------- (8)
𝐦1 +𝐦2 𝐦1 +𝐦2

Case 1 -If two masses are equal, 𝐦1 = 𝐦2 = 𝒎

Substituting in eqns (7) and (8)
2mu2
v1 = = u2
2m
2mu1
v2 = =u1
2m

ie.,the bodies will exchange their velocities

Case 2- If one mass dominates, 𝐦2 > > 𝐦1 and 𝐮2 = 0
m1 + m2 = m2 𝑎𝑛𝑑 m1 − m2 = −m2
( m1 −m2 )u1 m2 u 1
v1 = =− = -u1
m1 +m2 m2
2m1 u1 2 x 0 x u1
v2 = = =0
m1 +m2 m2

(since m1 is very small , it can be neglected)

The heavier mass comes to rest while the lighter mass reverses its
velocity.
Elastic Collisions in Two Dimensions

Consider the elastic collision of a moving mass m1 with the stationary

mass m2 .
Since momentum is a vector ,it has 2 equations in x and y directions.

Equation for conservation of momentum in x direction

𝐦1 𝐮1 = 𝐦1 𝐯1 𝐜𝐨𝐬𝛉1 + 𝐦2 𝐯2 𝐜𝐨𝐬𝛉2

Equation for conservation of momentum in y direction

0 = 𝐦1 𝐯1 𝐬𝐢𝐧𝛉1 − 𝐦2 𝐯2 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉2

Equation for conservation of kinetic energy,(KE is a scalar quantity)

𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
𝐦𝟏 𝐮𝟐𝟏 = 𝐦𝟏 𝐯𝟏𝟐 + 𝐦𝟐 𝐯𝟐𝟐
𝟐 𝟐 𝟐
 Chapter 6
Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion
Rigid Body
Ideally a rigid body is a body with a perfectly definite and unchanging
shape. The distances between different pairs of such a body do not change.
Motion of a rigid body
The motion of a rigid body which is not pivoted or fixed in some way is
either a pure translation or a combination of translation and rotation.
The motion of a rigid body which is pivoted or fixed in some way is
rotation.
1)Pure Translational Motion
In pure translational motion at any instant of time every particle of the
body has the same velocity.
Eg: A block moving down an inclined plane.

Any point like P1 or P2 of the block moves with

the same velocity at any instant of time.

2)Pure Rotational Motion

In pure rotational motion at any instant of time every point in the rotating
rigid body has the same angular velocity,but different linear velocity.
i) Rotation about a fixed axis

Eg: A ceiling fan A potter’s wheel.

The line along which the body is fixed is termed as its axis of rotation.
In rotation of a rigid body about a fixed axis, every particle of the body
moves in a circle, which lies in a plane perpendicular to the axis and has its
centre on the axis.
ii) Rotation about an axis which is not fixed

Eg: A spinning top An oscillating table fan

3)Rolling Motion
It is a combination of translational and rotational motion.
Eg A solid cylinder moving down an inclined plane.

Points P1, P2, P3 and P4 have different

velocities at any instant of time. In fact, the
velocity of the point of contact P3 is zero at
any instant, if the cylinder rolls without
slipping.

Centre Of Mass
The centre of is a hypothetical point where the entire mass of an object
may be assumed to be concentrated to visualise its motion.

Consider a two particle system. Let C be the centre of mass which is at a

distancev X from origin.
⃗⃗ = 𝐦𝟏 𝐫𝟏+𝐦𝟐𝐫𝟐
𝐑
𝒎𝟏 +𝒎𝟐

⃗⃗ = 𝐦𝟏𝐫𝟏+𝐦𝟐𝐫𝟐
𝐑 where M=𝒎𝟏 + 𝒎𝟐
𝐌
 𝑚1 𝑥1 +𝑚2 𝑥2
x coordinate of centre of mass 𝑋=
𝑚1 +𝑚2
𝑚1 𝑦1 +𝑚2 𝑦2
y coordinate of centre of mass 𝑌=
𝑚1 +𝑚2
𝑚1 𝑧1 +𝑚2 𝑧2
z coordinate of centre of mass 𝑍=
𝑚1 +𝑚2
If we have n particles of masses 𝑚1 , 𝑚2 , ... 𝑚𝑛

⃗ = 𝐦𝟏𝐫𝟏 +𝐦𝟐𝐫𝟐 +⋯……..+𝐦𝐧 𝐫𝐧

⃗𝐑 --------(1)
𝐌

⃗⃗ = ∑𝐦𝐢 𝐫𝐢
𝐑 where M =m1 + m2 +…….+mn
𝐌

If the origin is chosen to be the centre of mass then𝑅⃗ = 0

∑mi r⃗i
0=
M

∑mi ri = 0
Example
Find the centre of mass of three particles at the vertices of an equilateral
triangle. The masses of the particles are 100g, 150g, and 200g respectively.
Each side of the equilateral triangle is 0.5m long.

𝑚1 𝑦1 +𝑚2 𝑦2 +𝑚3 𝑦3
𝑌=
𝑚1 +𝑚2 +𝑚3
Motion of Centre of Mass
Position vector of centre of mass
⃗ = ∑mi r⃗i
R M
𝐦𝟏 𝐫𝟏 +𝐦𝟐 𝐫𝟐 +⋯……..+𝐦𝐧 𝐫𝐧
⃗𝐑
⃗ = --------(1)
𝐌
where M =m1 + m2 +…….+mn
Velocity of centre of mass
Differentiating
d
⃗R = d { m1 r⃗1 +m2 r⃗2 +⋯……..+mn r⃗n }
dt dt M
d d d
m1 r1 + m2 r2 + ⋯ … . . +mn rn
⃗V = dt dt dt
M
𝐦𝟏 𝐯⃗𝟏 +𝐦𝟐 𝐯⃗𝟐 +⋯……..+𝐦𝐧 𝐯⃗𝐧
⃗ =
𝐕 --------------(2)
𝐌

Acceleration of centre of mass

Differentiating
d ⃗ 1 +m2 v
d m1 v ⃗ 2 +⋯……..+mn v
⃗n
⃗V = { }
dt dt M
d d d
m1 v ⃗ 1 + m2 v ⃗ 2 + ⋯ … . . +mn v ⃗n
⃗ = dt dt dt
A
M
𝐦𝟏 𝐚⃗𝟏 +𝐦𝟐 𝐚⃗𝟐 +⋯……..+𝐦𝐧 𝐚⃗𝐧
⃗⃗⃗𝐀 = ………………(3)
𝐌

Force on centre of mass

Acceleration of centre of mass
m a⃗ + m2 a⃗2 + ⋯ … … . . +mn a⃗n
⃗A = 1 1
M
MA⃗ = m1 a⃗1 + m2 a⃗2 + ⋯ … … . . +mn a⃗n

𝐅𝐞𝐱𝐭 = m1 a⃗1 + m2 a⃗2 + ⋯ … … . . +mn a⃗n

𝐅𝐞𝐱𝐭 = 𝐅𝟏 + 𝐅𝟐 + ⋯ … … . . +𝐅𝐧
⃗
𝐅𝐞𝐱𝐭 = MA
The centre of mass of a system of particles moves as if all the mass of the
system was concentrated at the centre of mass and all the external forces
were applied at that point.
The centre of mass of the fragments of the projectile continues along the
same parabolic path which it would have followed if there were no
explosion.
Linear Momentum of centre of mass
Velocity of centre of mass
⃗ 1 +m2 v
m1 v ⃗ 2 +⋯……..+mn v
⃗n
⃗V =
M
⃗ = m1 v
MV ⃗ 1 + m2 v
⃗ 2 + ⋯ … … . . +mn v
⃗n
⃗ = 𝐩
𝐏 ⃗𝟏+𝐩 ⃗ 𝟐 + ⋯ … … . . +𝐩
⃗𝐧

Law of Conservation of Momentum for a System of Particles

If Newton’s second law is extended to a system of particles,
d⃗P
⃗Fext =
dt
When the sum of external forces acting on a system of particles is zero
⃗Fext = 0
d⃗P
=0
dt
⃗ = constant
P

Thus, when the total external force acting on a system of particles is zero,
the total linear momentum of the system is constant. This is the law of
conservation of the total linear momentum of a system of particles.
But ⃗P = MV⃗
MV⃗ = constant
⃗V = 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡
When the total external force on the system is zero the velocity of the
centre of mass remains constant or the CM of the system is in uniform
motion.
Vector Product or Cross product of Two Vectors
Vector product of two vectors A ⃗ and B⃗ is defined as
⃗ x ⃗𝐁
𝐀 ⃗ = AB 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝜽 𝐧 ̂
where A and B are magnitudes of ⃗A and ⃗B
𝜽 is the angle between ⃗A and ⃗B
𝑛̂ is the unit vector perpendicular to the plane containing A ⃗ and B
⃗
The direction of ⃗A x ⃗B is given by right hand screw rule or right hand rule
Right hand screw rule
If we turn the head of screw in the direction from ⃗A to ⃗B ,then the tip of the
screw advances in the direction ofA⃗ x ⃗B

Right hand rule

if the fingers of right hand are curled up in the direction from ⃗A to ⃗B, then
the stretched thumb points in the direction of ⃗A x ⃗B

▪ The vector product is not commutative

⃗ x ⃗𝐁
𝐀 ⃗ ≠ ⃗𝐁
⃗ x 𝐀
⃗
▪ Vector product obeys distributive law
⃗ x ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐀 (𝐁 + 𝐂 )= 𝐀⃗ x ⃗𝐁
⃗ +𝐀
⃗ 𝐱𝐂

⃗ = ⃗𝟎
⃗ x𝐀
▪ 𝐀
▪ 𝒊̂ × 𝒊̂ = 𝟎 , 𝒋̂ × 𝒋̂ = 𝟎 , ̂×𝒌
𝒌 ̂=𝟎
̂,
▪ 𝒊̂ × 𝒋̂ = 𝒌 ̂ = 𝒊̂,
𝒋̂ × 𝒌 ̂ × 𝒊̂ = 𝒋̂
𝒌
̂,
▪ 𝒋̂ × 𝒊̂ = −𝒌 ̂ × 𝒋̂ = −𝒊̂,
𝒌 ̂ = −𝒋̂
𝒊̂ × 𝒌
Angular Velocity and its Relation with Linear Velocity

⃗⃗⃗ is directed along the fixed axis

The angular velocity is a vector quantity. 𝝎
as shown.
The linear velocity of the particle is
⃗⃗⃗
𝒗 =𝝎⃗⃗⃗ × 𝒓
⃗
⃗⃗⃗ and 𝒓
It is perpendicular to both 𝝎 ⃗ and is directed along the tangent to
the circle described by the particle.

Figure shows the direction of angular velocity when the body rotates in
clockwise and anti clockwise direction.
For rotation about a fixed axis, the direction of the vector ω does not
change with time. Its magnitude may change from instant to instant. For
the more general rotation, both the magnitude and the direction of ω may
change from instant to instant.
Angular acceleration
Angular acceleration α
⃗ is defined as the time rate of change of angular
velocity.
⃗⃗⃗
𝐝𝛚
⃗ =
𝛂
𝐝𝐭
If the axis of rotation is fixed, the direction of ω and hence, that of α is
fixed. In this case the vector equation reduces to a scalar equation
dω
α=
dt
Torque or Moment of Force
The rotational analogue of force is torque or moment of force .

If a force ⃗⃗⃗
𝐅 acts on a single particle at a point P whose position with
respect to the origin O is 𝒓⃗ ,then torque about origin o is
⃗ = r F sinθ
𝝉
⃗ x ⃗⃗⃗
⃗𝝉 = 𝒓 𝐅
▪ Torque has dimensions M L2 T −2
▪ Its dimensions are the same as those of work or energy.
▪ It is a very different physical quantity than work.
▪ Moment of a force is a vector, while work is a scalar.
▪ The SI unit of moment of force is Newton-metre (Nm)
The magnitude of the moment of force may be written
τ = (r sin θ ) F = 𝒓⊥ F
τ = r (F sin θ ) = r 𝐅⊥

where r⊥ = r sin θ is the perpendicular distance of the line of action of F

form the origin and F⊥ = Fsin θ is the component of F in the direction
perpendicular to r.

Angular momentum of a particle

Angular momentum is the rotational analogue of linear momentum.
Angular momentum is a vector quantity. It could also be referred to as
moment of (linear) momentum.
𝒍=𝒓 ⃗ ×𝒑⃗
𝒍 = 𝒓𝒑𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉
Relation connecting Torque and Angular momentum
𝑙 =𝑟×𝑝
Differentiating
𝑑𝑙 d
= (r×p
⃗ )
𝑑𝑡 dt
𝑑𝑙 dr⃗ ⃗
dp
= ×p
⃗ + rx
𝑑𝑡 dt dt
dr⃗ ⃗
dp
⃗ = mv
p ⃗ , =v
⃗ , = ⃗⃗F
dt dt
𝑑𝑙
=v ⃗ + r x ⃗⃗F
⃗ × mv
𝑑𝑡
⃗ = 0 , (r x ⃗⃗F =τ⃗ )
⃗ ×v
v
𝑑𝑙
=0 + 𝜏
𝑑𝑡
ⅆ𝒍
⃗ =
𝝉 ⅆ𝒕
Thus, the time rate of change of the angular momentum of a particle is
equal to the torque acting on it.
⃗
dp
This is the rotational analogue of the equation ⃗⃗F = , which expresses
dt
Newton’s second law for the translational motion of a single particle.

Relation connecting Torque and Angular momentum for a system

of particles
⃗
ⅆ𝑳
⃗𝝉 =
ⅆ𝒕
⃗
where 𝐿 = 𝑙1 + 𝑙2 + ⋯ ⋅ +𝑙𝑛
Law of Conservation of Angular momentum
For a system of particles
⃗
dL
τ⃗ext =
dt

If external torque τ⃗ext = 0 ,

⃗
dL
=0
dt

𝐋 = 𝐜𝐨𝐧𝐬𝐭𝐚𝐧𝐭
If the total external torque on a system of particles is zero, then
the total angular momentum of the system is conserved i.e,
remains constant.
Example
Find the torque of a force 𝟕𝐢̂ + 𝟑𝐉̂ − 𝟓𝐤̂ about the origin. The force acts on a
̂.
particle whose position vector is 𝐢̂ − 𝐉̂ + 𝐤
𝜏 = 𝑟 x ⃗⃗F
𝜏 = (î − Ĵ + k̂) x(7î + 3Ĵ − 5k̂)

+ - +
î 𝐽̂ 𝑘̂
𝜏 =|1 −1 1 |
7 3 −5
⃗τ = î [(−1 x − 5) −(3 x 1) ] - Ĵ [(1x-5)- (7x1)] + k̂ [(1x3) -(7x-1)]
τ⃗ = î [5 - 3] - Ĵ [-5 – 7] + k̂ [3 – -7]
τ⃗ = 2î +12 Ĵ + 10k̂

Equilibrium of a Rigid Body

A rigid body is said to be in mechanical equilibrium, if it is in both
translational equilibrium and rotational equilibrium.
i.e, for a body in mechanical equilibrium its linear momentum and angular
momentum are not changing with time.
Translational Equilibrium
When the total external force on the rigid body is zero, then the total
linear momentum of the body does not change with time and the body will
be in translational equilibrium .

Rotational Equilibrium
When the total external torque on the rigid body is zero, the total angular
momentum of the body does not change with time and the body will be in
rotational equilibrium .

Partial equilibrium
A body may be in partial equilibrium, i.e., it may be in translational
equilibrium and not in rotational equilibrium, or it may be in rotational
equilibrium and not in translational equilibrium.
Here net torque is zero and the body is in rotational equilibrium.
Net force is not zero and the body is not in traslational equilibrium

Here net torque is not zero and the body will not be rotational
equilibrium.
Net force is zero and the body will be in traslational equilibrium.
Couple
A pair of equal and opposite forces with different lines of action is known
as a couple. A couple produces rotation without translation.

Our fingers apply a couple to turn the lid The Earth’s magnetic field exerts equal and
opposite forces on the poles of a compass
needle. These two forces form a couple.
Principles of Moments

The lever is a system in mechanical equilibrium.

For rotational equilibrium the sum of moments must be zero,
𝐝𝟏 𝐅𝟏 − 𝐝𝟐 𝐅𝟐 = 0
The equation for the principle of moments for a lever is
𝐝𝟏 𝐅𝟏 = 𝐝𝟐 𝐅𝟐
load arm × load = effort arm × effort
𝐹1 𝑑2
Mechanical Advantage MA =
𝐹2
=
𝑑1
Centre of gravity
The Centre of gravity of a body is the point where the total gravitational
torque on the body is zero.

▪ The centre of gravity of the body coincides with the centre of mass.
For a body is small, g does not vary from one point of the body to the
other. Then the centre of gravity of the body coincides with the
centre of mass.
▪ If the body is so extended that g varies from part to part of the body,
then the centre of gravity and centre of mass will not coincide.

Moment of Inertia
Moment of Inertia is the rotational analogue of mass.
Moment of inertia is a measure of rotational inertia

The moment of inertia of a particle of mass m rotating about an axis is

I =m𝐫 𝟐
The moment of inertia of a rigid body is

The moment of inertia of a rigid body depends on

• The mass of the body, its shape and size
• Distribution of mass about the axis of rotation
• The position and orientation of the axis of rotation.
Moments of Inertia of some regular shaped bodies about specific axes

Rotational Kinetic energy

Cosider a particle of mass m rotating about an axis of radius r with angular
velocity 𝜔
The kinetic energy of motion of this particle is
1
𝑘𝐸 = 𝑚𝑣 2
2
But v = r 𝜔
1
𝑘𝐸 = 𝑚𝑟 2 𝜔2
2
I =m𝑟 2
𝟏
Rotational 𝐤𝐄 = 𝐈𝛚𝟐
𝟐

Radius of Gyration (k)

The radius of gyration can be defined as the distance of a mass point from
the axis of roatation whose mass is equal to the whole mass of the body
and whose moment of inertia is equal to moment of inertia of the whole
body about the axis.
 If K is the radius of gyration, we can write
I =M𝑘 2
𝑰
𝒌=√
𝑴
Flywheel
The machines, such as steam engine and the automobile engine, etc., that
produce rotational motion have a disc with a large moment of inertia,
called a flywheel. Because of its large moment of inertia, the flywheel
resists the sudden increase or decrease of the speed of the vehicle. It
allows a gradual change in the speed and prevents jerky motions, thereby
ensuring a smooth ride for the passengers on the vehicle.
Kinematics of Rotational Motion about a Fixed Axis
The kinematical equations of linear motion with uniform (i.e. constant)
acceleration

The corresponding kinematic equations for rotational motion with

uniform angular acceleration are:

Dynamics of Rotational Motion about a Fixed Axis

Comparison of Translational and Rotational Motion
Work done by a torque

Work done by a force F acting on a particle of a body rotating about a fixed

axis
dW = F. ds
dW= Fds cosφ
but φ +α =90, φ = 90 – α
cos( 90 – α) =sin α
dW = F(r dθ)sinα
dW = r F sin α dθ
dW = 𝜏 dθ
W= 𝝉 θ
Instantaneous power by a Torque
𝑑𝑊
P=
𝑑𝑡
But, dW =𝜏 dθ
dθ
P= 𝜏
𝑑𝑡
P = τω
Angular Momentum in Case of Rotation about a Fixed Axis.(or)
Relation Connecting Angular Momentum And Moment Of Inertia
Angular momentum of a particle, 𝑙 =𝑟×𝑝
For a system of particles , ⃗L = ∑ 𝑙
⃗ = ∑ ⃗r × p
L ⃗
⃗L = ∑ 𝑟𝑝 sin 90 𝑘̂
⃗ = ∑ 𝑟𝑝 𝑘̂
L
⃗L = ∑ 𝑟𝑚𝑣 𝑘̂ (p=mv)
⃗L = ∑ 𝑟𝑚(𝑟𝜔) 𝑘̂ (v=r𝜔)
⃗L = ∑ 𝑚𝑟 2 𝜔 𝑘̂
⃗L = Iωk̂
⃗⃗⃗
𝐋 = 𝐈𝛚
Relation Connecting Torque and Angular Acceleration
⃗
dL
τ⃗ =
dt
But ⃗L = 𝐼𝜔
⃗
⃗⃗⃗
d𝐼𝜔
τ⃗ =
dt
d𝜔⃗⃗⃗
τ⃗ = I
dt
⃗
𝛕⃗ = 𝐈 𝛂
Conservation of angular momentum
If the external torque is zero, angular momentum is constant.
L = constant
Iω = constant
When I increases ,ω decreases and vice versa, so that Iω is constant.
While the chair is rotating with
considerable angular speed , if you
stretch your arms horizontally, moment
of inertia(I) increases and as a result, the
angular speed(ω) is reduced.
If you bring back your arms closer to
your body, moment of inertia(I)
decreases and as a result, the angular
speed(ω) increases again.

A circus acrobat and a diver take

advantage of this principle.
Also, skaters and classical, Indian or
western, dancers performing a pirouette
on the toes of one foot display ‘mastery’
over this principle.
 Chapter 7
Gravitation
Kepler’s Laws
1.Law of orbits
All planets move in elliptical orbits with the Sun situated at one of the foci
of the ellipse.

PA is the major axis

BC is the minor axis

2.Law of areas
The line that joins any planet to the sun sweeps equal areas in equal
⃗
𝚫𝐀
intervals of time. i.e, 𝐚𝐫𝐞𝐚𝐥 𝐯𝐞𝐥𝐨𝐜𝐢𝐭𝐲 is 𝐜𝐨𝐧𝐬𝐭𝐚𝐧𝐭
𝚫𝐭
The planets move slower when they are farther from the sun than when
they are nearer.
The law of areas is a consequence of conservation of angular momentum.

Proof
The area swept out by the planet of mass
m in time interval Δt is
⃗ = 1 (r × v
ΔA ⃗ Δt)
2
⃗ = mv
p ⃗ ,
⃗
p
⃗ =
v
m
⃗⃗
ΔA 1 ⃗
p
= (r × )
Δt 2 m
⃗ =r×p
L ⃗
⃗
𝚫𝐀 𝐋
=
𝚫𝐭 𝟐𝐦
For a central force, which is directed along r, angular momentum,⃗⃗⃗L is a
constant.
⃗
𝚫𝐀
=𝐜𝐨𝐧𝐬𝐭𝐚𝐧𝐭
𝚫𝐭
This is the law of areas.
3.Law of periods
The square of the time period of revolution of a planet is proportional to
the cube of the semi- major axis of the ellipse traced out by the planet.
𝐓 𝟐 ∝ 𝐚𝟑

Universal Law of Gravitation

Every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force which is
directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely
proportional to the square of the distance between them .
𝐦𝟏 𝐦𝟐
𝐅=𝐆 𝟐
𝐫
where G is the universal gravitational constant.
In vector Form
⃗ = G m12m2 (−r̂) =−G m12m2 r̂
F
r r
r̂ is the unit vector from m1 to m2 .
The gravitational force is attractive, as the force 𝐅 is along – r.
By Newton’s third law the, gravitational force ⃗F12 on the body 1 due to 2
⃗ 21 on the body 2 due to 1 are related as F
and F ⃗ 12 = – F
⃗ 21 .

The Gravitational Constant

The value of the gravitational constant G was determined experimentally
by English scientist Henry Cavendish in 1798.
G = 6.67×1𝟎−𝟏𝟏 N 𝐦𝟐 /𝐤𝐠 𝟐
Acceleration due to gravity of the Earth
Consider a body of mass m on the surface of earth of mass M and radius R.
The gravitational force between body and earth is given by
GMm
F= -----------(1)
R2
By Newton’s second law
F=mg -----------(2)
where g is acceleration due to gravity
From Eq (1) and (2)
GMm
mg =
R2
𝐆𝐌
g=
𝐑𝟐
Acceleration due to gravity is independent of mass of the body.
The average value of g on the surface of earth is 9.8m𝐬 −𝟐 .
Acceleration due to gravity below and above the surface of earth
1.Acceleration due to gravity at a height h above the surface of the earth.
Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of
earth
GM
g = 2 ------------(1)
R
Acceleration due to gravity at a height above
the surface of earth
GM
gh = 2 ----------(2)
(R+h)
GM
for , h << R, gh = h
R2 (1+ )2
R
GM h
gh = (1 + )−2
R2 R
h
substituting from eq(1) , g h = g(1 + )−2
R
Using binomial expression and neglecting higher order terms.
𝟐𝐡
𝐠 𝐡 ≅ 𝐠 (𝟏 − )
𝐑
Thus, as we go above earth’s surface, the acceleration due gravity
𝟐𝐡
decreases by a factor (𝟏 − )
𝐑

2.Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d below the surface of the earth

We assume that the entire earth is of uniform density. Then mass of earth
Mass =volume x density
4
M= πR3 ρ ------------(1)
3
Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of
earth
GM
g= 2 -------------(2)
R
Substituting the value of M in eq(2)
G 4
g = 2 ( πR3 ρ)
R 3
4
g = πRρG ---------------(3)
3
Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d below the surface of earth
4
g d = π(R − d)ρG ---------(4)
3
4
eq(4) gd 3
π(R−d)ρG
------ = 4
eq(3) g πRρG
3
gd (R−d)
=
g R
𝐝
𝐠 𝐝 = 𝐠(𝟏 − )
𝐑
Thus, as we go down below earth’s surface, the acceleration due gravity
𝐝
decreases by a factor(𝟏 − )
𝐑
▪ The value of acceleration due to earth’s gravity is maximum on its
surface and decreases whether you go up or down.
▪ At the centre of earth acceleration due to earth’s gravity is zero.

Example
At what height the value of acceleration due to gravity will be half of
that on surface of earth. (Given the radius of earth R =6400km)
h
. g h = g(1 + )−2
R
g
gh =
2
g h
= g(1 + )−2
2 R
1 h
= (1 + )−2
2 R
h
2 = (1 + )2
R
h
√2 =1 + R
h
= √2-1
R
h = (√2-1) R
h = (1.414 -1) 6400 = 2650 km

Example
Calculate the value of acceleration due to gravity at a height equal to half of
the radius of earth.
GM
gh =
(R+h)2
R
h=
2
GM GM
gh = R 2
= 3 2
(R+ 2 ) (2R)

GM 4 GM 4
=9 = = 𝑔
R 2 9 R2 9
4
Gravitational Potential Energy
Gravitational potential energy at point is defined as the work done in
displacing the particle from infinity to that point without acceleration.

Gravitational force on a mass m at a distance x

GMm
F=
x2
The work done to give a displacement dx to the mass
dW=Fdx
GMm
dW= dx
x2
Total work done to move the mass from ∞ to r
r GMm
W =∫∞ dx
x2
r 1
W = GMm ∫∞ dx
x2
−1 r
W = GMm [ ]
x ∞

1 1
W=−GMm [ − ]
r ∞
−GMm
W=
r

This work is is stored as gravitational PE in the body.

−𝐆𝐌𝐦
U=
𝐫

Gravitational Potential
The gravitational potential due to the gravitational force of the earth is
defined as the potential energy of a particle of unit mass at that point.
The gravitational Potential energy of a bodyof mass m at a distance r
−GMm
U=
r
For unit mass m=1
−𝐆𝐌
So gravitational potential, V=
𝐫
Escape speed
The minimum speed required for an object to reach infinity i.e. to escape
from the earth’s gravitational pull is called escape speed.
Let the body thrown from the surface of earth to infinity.
Total initial energy of the body
TE =KE + PE
1 GMm
TE = mvi2 - -------(1)
2 R

1
Total final energy, TE = mvf2 +0 ------------(2)
2
By conservation of energy TE is constant.
1 GMm 1
mvi2 - = mvf2
2 R 2

RHS is always always a positive quantity with minimum value zero

Taking the minimum value
1 GMm
mvi2 - =0
2 r
1 GMm
mvi2 =
2 R
2GM
vi2 =
R
𝟐𝐆𝐌
𝐯𝐞 = √
𝐑
GM
But g= , GM =gR2
R2
2gR2
ve = √
R
𝐯𝐞 = √𝟐𝐠𝐑
𝐄𝐬𝐜ape velocity is independent of mass of the body.
𝐄𝐬𝐜𝐚𝐩𝐞 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝 (𝐨𝐫 𝐞𝐬𝐜𝐚𝐩𝐞 𝐯𝐞𝐥𝐨𝐜𝐢𝐭𝐲) on the surface of earth is 11.2km/s

Moon has no atmosphere. Why?

The escape speed of moon is about 2.3 km/s. which is less than the
average speed of gas molecules of moon. Thus gas molecules escape from
surface of moon and it has no atmosphere.

Earth Satellites
Earth satellites are objects which revolve around the earth.
Their motion is very similar to the motion of planets around the Sun and
hence Kepler’s laws of planetary motion are equally applicable to them.
Satellites are of two types (1) Natural satellites and artificial satellites.
Moon is the natural satellite of earth whose time period of revolution is
27.3 days.
Artificial satellites are used for telecommunication, geophysics and
meteorology etc.

Orbital Speed
The speed with which a satellites revolves around earth is called orbital
speed.
Consider a satellite of mass m in a circular orbit of a distance (R + h) from
the centre of the earth. The necessary centripetal force for revolution is
provided by gravitational force between earth and satellite.
GMm
Fgravitational =
(R+h)2
mv2
Fcentripetal =
R+h
Fcentripetal = Fgravitational
mv2 GMm
=
R+h (R+h)2
2 GM
v =
(R+h)
𝐆𝐌
𝒗𝒐 = √
(𝐑+𝐡)
Thus orbital velocity 𝒗𝒐 decreases as height ,h increases.
If the satellite is very close to earth (R+h) ≈R
𝐆𝐌
𝒗𝒐 = √
𝐑
GM
But g= , GM =gR2
R2
𝒗𝒐 = √𝒈𝑹

Relation Connecting Escape Velocity and Orbital Velocity

GM
Orbital Velocity ,v0 = √ or vo = √gR
R

2GM
Escape Velocity ,ve = √ or ve = √2gR
R

𝐯𝐞 = √𝟐 𝐯𝐨
Escape Velocity = √𝟐 x Orbital Velocity
Period of a Satellite
Period of a satellite is the time required for a satellite to complete one
revolution around the earth in a fixed orbit.
Distance
Time=
𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑
For one revolution
circumference of the orbit
Period T=
𝑜𝑟𝑏𝑖𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑
2𝜋 (𝑅+ℎ)
T= GM
√(R+h)

(𝑹+𝒉) 𝟑
T=𝟐𝝅√
𝐆𝐌

If the satellite is very close to earth (R+h) ≈R

𝑹 𝟑
T=𝟐𝝅√
𝐆𝐌
GM
But g= , GM =g𝑅 2
𝑅2
𝑅3
T=2𝜋√
g𝑅 2
𝑹
T=𝟐𝝅√
𝐠
If we substitute the numerical values, g = 9.8 m𝑠 −2 and R = 6400 km.,
6400 𝑥 103
T=2𝜋√
9.8
𝑇𝑜 =85 minutes

Proof of Kepler’s third law

(R+h)3
Period of a satellite, T= 2π√
GM
(R+h)3
T2= 4π2
GM
4π 2
T2= (R + h)3
GM
T 2 =constant x (R + h)3
T 2 ∝ (R + h)3
𝐓 𝟐 ∝ 𝐚𝟑
Which is Kepler’s Law of Periods.
Weighing the Earth :
You are given following data: g = 9.81𝑠 −2 m, 𝑅𝐸 = 6.37×106 m, the
distance to the moon R = 3.84× 108 m and the time period of the moon’s
revolution is 27.3 days. Obtain mass of the Earth 𝑀𝐸 in two different ways.
First method
𝐺𝑀
g= 2
𝑅

Second method
𝑅3
T=2𝜋√
GM

Both methods yield almost the same answer

Energy of an orbiting satellite
1
KE= mvo2
2
GM GM
vo = √ , vo2 =
R R
1 GM
KE= m 𝑥
2 R
GMm
KE=
2R
−GMm
PE =
R
Energy =KE + PE
GMm −GMm
E= +
2R R
−𝐆𝐌𝐦
E=
𝟐𝐑
The total energy of an circularly orbiting satellite is negative, which
means that the satellite is bound to the planet .If the total energy is
positive or zero, the object escapes to infinity. Satellites are always at finite
distance from the earth and hence their energies cannot be positive or
zero.
 Chapter 8
Mechanical Properties of Solids

A solid has definite shape and size. In order to change (or deform) the
shape or size of a body, a force is required.
Elasticity
The property of a body, by virtue of which it tends to regain its original
size and shape when the applied force is removed, is known as elasticity
and such substances are called elastic .
Eg: Steel, Rubber
Steel is more elastic than rubber.
Plasticity
Some substances have no tendency to regain their previous shape on the
removal of deforming force and they get permanently deformed. Such
substances are called plastic and this property is called plasticity.
Eg:Putty and mud
Stress and Strain
When a force is applied on body, it is deformed to a small or large extent
depending upon the nature of the material of the body and the magnitude
of the deforming force. When a body is subjected to a deforming force, a
restoring force is developed in the body. This restoring force is equal in
magnitude but opposite in direction to the applied force.
Stress
The restoring force per unit area is known as stress.
If F is the force applied and A is the area of cross section of the body,
𝑭
Stress =
𝑨
The SI unit of stress is N 𝑚−2 or pascal (Pa)
Dimensional formula of stress is [ M𝐿−1 𝑇 −2 ]
Strain
Strain is defined as the fractional change in dimension.
𝐂𝐡𝐚𝐧𝐠𝐞 𝐢𝐧 𝐝𝐢𝐦𝐞𝐧𝐬𝐢𝐨𝐧
Strain = 𝐎𝐫𝐢𝐠𝐢𝐧𝐚𝐥 𝐝𝐢𝐦𝐞𝐧𝐬𝐢𝐨𝐧

Strain has no unit and dimension.

There are three ways in which a solid may change its dimensions when an
external force acts on it. As a result there are three types of stress and
strain.
1. Longitudinal Stress and Longitudinal Strain
2. Shearing Stress and Shearing Strain
3. Hydraulic Stress and Hydraulic Strain (Volume Strain)
1.Longitudinal Stress and Longitudinal Strain

Longitudinal stress is defined as the restoring force per unit area when
force is applied normal to the cross-sectional area of a cylinder.
𝑭
Longitudinal stress=
𝑨
If the cylinder is stretched the stress is called tensile stress and If the
cylinder is compressed it is called compressive stress.
Longitudinal strain is defined as the ratio of change in length(ΔL) to
original length(L) of the body .
𝐂𝐡𝐚𝐧𝐠𝐞 𝐢𝐧 𝐥𝐞𝐧𝐠𝐭𝐡
Longitudinal strain =
𝐎𝐫𝐢𝐠𝐢𝐧𝐚𝐥 𝐥𝐞𝐧𝐠𝐭𝐡

𝚫𝐋
Longitudinal strain =
𝑳

2.Shearing Stress and Shearing Strain

Shearing stress is defined as the restoring force per unit area when a
tangential force is applied on the cylinder.
𝐅
Shearing stress=
𝐀
Shearing strain is defined as the ratio of relative displacement of the faces
Δx to the length of the cylinder L
𝚫𝐱
Shearing strain = =tanθ
𝑳
Usually θ is very small, tan θ ≈ θ

Shearing strain = θ
3.Hydraulic Stress and Hydraulic strain (Volume Strain)

When a solid sphere placed in the fluid, the force applied by the fluid acts
in perpendicular direction at each point of the surface.
The restoring force per unit area of solid sphere, placed in the fluid is
called hydraulic stress.
𝐅
Hydraulic stress= = -P (pressure)
𝐀
The negative sign indicates that when pressure increases, the volume decreases.
Volume strain(hydraulic strain) is defined as the ratio of change in volume
(ΔV) to the original volume (V).
𝐂𝐡𝐚𝐧𝐠𝐞 𝐢𝐧 𝐯𝐨𝐥𝐮𝐦𝐞
Volume strain=
𝐎𝐫𝐢𝐠𝐢𝐧𝐚𝐥 𝐯𝐨𝐥𝐮𝐦𝐞
𝚫𝐕
Volume strain=
𝐕

Hooke’s Law
For small deformations the stress is directly proportional to strain. This is
known as Hooke’s law.
Stress ∝ Strain
stress = k × strain
𝐒𝐭𝐫𝐞𝐬𝐬
=𝐤
𝐬𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐢𝐧
where k is a constant and is known as Modulus of Elasticity.

▪ The SI unit of modulus of elasticity is N 𝑚−2 or pascal (Pa)

(same as that of stress,since strain is unitless)
▪ Dimensional formula is [ ML−1 T −2 ]
Stress-Strain Curve
A typical stress-strain curve for a metal is as shown in figure:

In the region from O to A

The curve is linear. In this region, stress is proportional to strain i.e,
Hooke’s law is obeyed.

In the region from A to B

Stress and strain are not proportional, i.e, Hooke’s law is not obeyed.
Nevertheless, the body is still elastic.

The point B in the curve is known as yield point or elastic limit.

The stress corresponding to yield point is known as yield strength (𝑺𝒚 )

of the material.
In the region from B to D
Beyond the point B ,the strain increases rapidly even for a small change in
the stress. When the load is removed, at some point C between B and D,
the body does not regain its original dimension. The material is said to
have a permanent set. The material shows plastic behaviour in this region.
The point D on the graph is the ultimate tensile strength (𝑺𝒖 ) of the
material.
In the region from D to E
Beyond this point D, additional strain is produced even by a reduced
applied force and fracture occurs at point E.
The point E is called Fracture Point.
If the ultimate strength and fracture points D and E are close, the material
is said to be brittle.
If D and E are far apart, the material is said to be ductile.
Elastomers
Substances like tissue of aorta, rubber etc. which can be stretched to cause
large strains are called elastomers.
• Eventhough elastic region is very large, the material does not obey
Hoke’s law for most of the regions.
• There is no well defined plastic region.

Elastic Moduli
The ratio of stress and strain, called modulus of elasticity. Depending upon
the types of stress and strain there are three moduli of elasticity.
1. Young’s Modulus(Y)
2. Shear Modulus or Rigidity Modulus (G)
3. Bulk modulus(B)
1.Young’s Modulus(Y)
The ratio of longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain is defined as
Young’s modulus of the material .
longitudinal stress
Y= longitudinal strain
F
A
Y= ΔL
L
𝐅𝐋
Y= 𝐀 𝚫𝐋
If F=mg and A = πr 2
𝐦𝐠𝐋
Y= 𝛑𝐫𝟐 𝚫𝐋
▪ SI unit of Young’s modulus is N 𝑚−2 or Pa.
▪ For metals Young’s moduli are large.
▪ Steel is more elastic than rubber as the Young’s modulus of steel is
large.
▪ Wood, bone, concrete and glass have rather small Young’s moduli.

Why steel is preferred in heavy-duty machines and in structural

designs?
Young’s modulus of steel is greater than that of copper, brass and
aluminium. It means that steel is more elastic than copper, brass and
aluminium. It is for this reason that steel is preferred in heavy-duty
machines and in structural designs.
Example
A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of 1.0 m. A 100
kN force stretches it along its length. Calculate (a) stress, (b) elongation,
and (c) strain on the rod. Young’s modulus, of structural steel is 2.0 × 1011
N 𝑚−2
𝐹 𝐹
(a) stress= = 𝜋𝑟 2
𝐴
100 𝑥 103 100 𝑥 103
= 3.14 𝑥 (10 𝑥 10−3 )2 =3.14 𝑥 10−4

=3.18 x𝟏𝟎𝟖 N𝒎−𝟐

𝐹𝐿
(b) Y= A ΔL
𝐹
( )𝐿
𝐴 3.18 x108 𝑥 1
ΔL = =
Y 2× 1011
= 1.59 x10−3 m
= 1.59 mm
ΔL
(c) Strain = 𝐿
1.59 x10−3
= 1
= 1.59 x𝟏𝟎−𝟑 m
Example
The stress-strain graphs for materials A and B are shown in Figure.

The graphs are drawn to the same scale.

(a) Which of the materials has the greater Young’s modulus?
(b) Which of the two is the stronger material?
(c) Which of the two materials is more ductile?
 stress
(a) Young’s modulus Y= = slpoe of the graph.
strain
Slope of graph for material A is greater than that of B.
So materials A has the greater Young’s modulus.

(b) Strength of a material is determined by the amount of stress

required to cause fracture.
The fracture point is greater for material A.
So material A is stronger than B

(c) The fracture point is far apart for material A than B.

So material A is more ductile than B.

2.Shear Modulus or Rigidity Modulus(G)

The ratio of shearing stress to the corresponding shearing strain is called
the shear modulus or Rigidity modulus of the material .
Shearing stress
G=
Shearing strain
𝐹 𝐹
𝐴 𝐴
G= Δx =
𝜃
𝐿
𝑭
G= 𝐀𝜽
SI unit of shear modulus is N 𝑚−2 or Pa.
Shear modulus is generally less than Young’s modulus.
For most materials G ≈ Y/3
Example
A square lead slab of side 50 cm and thickness 10 cm is subject to a
shearing force (on its narrow face) of 9.0 × 104 N. The lower edge is
riveted to the floor. How much will the upper edge be displaced? Given
shear modulus, G =5.6 × 109 Nm−2

.
 𝐹 9.0 × 104 9.0 × 104
Stress = = =
A 0.5 x0.1 0.05
6 −2
= 1.80 × 10 N 𝑚
stress
G= Δx
𝐿
𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑥 𝐿
Δx =
G
1.80 × 106 𝑥 0.5
= = 1.6 × 10−4 m = 0.16 mm
5.6 × 109
3.Bulk Modulus(B)
The ratio of hydraulic stress to the corresponding hydraulic strain is called
bulk modulus.
Hydraulic stress
B=
Hydraulic strain
F
A −P
B= ΔV = ΔV
V V

−𝐏𝐕
B=
𝚫𝐕

SI unit of Bulk modulus is N 𝑚−2 or Pa.

The negative sign indicates that when pressure increases, the volume
decreases. That is, if p is positive, ΔV is negative. Thus for a system in
equilibrium, the value of bulk modulus B is always positive.

Compressibility(k)
The reciprocal of the bulk modulus is called compressibility.
1
k=
B
−𝟏 𝚫𝐕
k=
𝐏 𝐕
▪ The bulk moduli for solids are much larger than for liquids, which are
again much larger than the bulk modulus for gases (air).
▪ Thus solids are least compressible whereas gases are most
compressible.
Example
The average depth of Indian Ocean is about 3000 m. Calculate the
fractional compression, ΔV/V, of water at the bottom of the ocean, given
that the bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 109 N 𝑚−2 . (Take g = 10 m 𝑠 −2 )
−P
B= ΔV
V
ΔV P
=B
V
P = hρg = 3000 x1000 x10 = 3x107 N m−2
ΔV 3x107
= 2.2 × 109 = 1.36 × 10−2
V
Poisson’s ratio
When a material is stretched in one direction, it tends to compress in the
direction perpendicular to that of force application and vice versa.
For example, a rubber band tends to become thinner when stretched.
The strain in the direction of applied force is called longitudinal strain.
Change in length
Longitudinal strain =
Original length
∆𝐿
= 𝐿

The strain perpendicular to the direction of applied force is called lateral

strain.
Change in diameter
Lateral Strain =
Original diameter
∆d
=
d
The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain is called Poisson’s ratio.
Lateral Strain
Poisson’s Ratio σ =
Longitudnal Strain
∆d
d
σ= ∆L
L
∆𝐝 𝐋
𝛔 = ∆𝐋 𝐱 𝐝
Poisson′ s ratio has no unit and dimension.
Elastic Potential Energy in a Stretched String
The workdone to deform a body against the inter atomic force is stored as
elastic PE.
 For a string, work done for a small elongation dl
dW = F.d 𝑙
𝑙
W=∫0 F. d𝑙
𝐹𝐿
But Y=
𝐴𝑙
,
𝑙 is the eleogation of string
𝑌𝐴 𝑙
F=
𝐿
𝑙 𝑌𝐴 𝑙
W=∫0 . d𝑙
𝐿
𝑌𝐴 𝑙2
= 𝑥
𝐿 2
𝑌𝐴𝑙 2
=
2𝐿
1 𝑙
= 𝑥Yx( )2xA𝑙
2 𝐿
1
= 𝑥 Young’s modulus x (𝑠𝑟𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛) 2 x volume
2
1 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠
= 𝑥 x (𝑠𝑟𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑛) 2 x volume
2 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛
1
W= x stress x strain x volume
2
This work done is equal to elastic Potential Energy.
𝟏
Elastic PE U = 𝐱 𝐬𝐭𝐫𝐞𝐬𝐬 x 𝐬𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐢𝐧 x volume
𝟐
Energy stored per unit volume
Energy
u=
𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒
𝟏
u= 𝐱 𝐬𝐭𝐫𝐞𝐬𝐬 x 𝐬𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐢𝐧
𝟐

Applications of Elastic Behaviour of Materials

1.Cranes used for lifting and moving heavy loads have a thick metal rope .
This is due to the fact that metals have greater youngs modulus.

Also, the elongation of the rope should not exceed the elastic limit. For this
thicker rope of radius about 3 cm is recommended. A single wire of this
radius would practically be a rigid rod. So the ropes are always made of a
number of thin wires braided together, like in pigtails, for ease in
manufacture, flexibility and strength.

2.The maximum height of a mountain on earth is ~10 km. The height is

limited by the elastic properties of rocks.
3.In the construction of bridges and buildings , the beams should not bend
too much or break. To reduce the bending for a given load, a material with
a large Young’s modulus Y is used.

A beam of length l, breadth b, and depth d when loaded at the centre by a

load W sags by an amount given by
𝐖 𝒍𝟑
δ=
𝟒𝒃ⅆ𝟑 𝒀
For a given load, the bending reduces when a material with a large
Young’s modulus Y is used.Bending can also be reduced by increasing
thebreadth b, and depth d of the beam.

Buckling
Bending can be effectively reduced by increasing the depth d of the beam.
But on increasing the depth, unless the load is exactly at the right place ,
the deep bar may bend sidewise(as in figure).This is called buckling.

To avoid buckling, beams with cross-sectional shape of I is used.

This section provides a large load bearing surface and enough depth to
prevent bending. This shape reduces the weight of the beam without
sacrificing the strength and hence reduces the cost.
 Chapter 9
Mechanical Properties of Fluids
Liquids and gases can flow and are therefore, called fluids.
The fluid does not have any resistance to change of its shape. Thus, the
shape of a fluid is governed by the shape of its container.
Basic difference between Liquids and Gases
A liquid is incompressible and has a free surface of its own. A gas is
compressible and it expands to occupy all the space available to it. Gas has
no free surface.
Pressure
The normal force(F) exerted by a fluid on an area A is called pressure.
𝐅
Pressure, P =
𝐀
Pressure is a scalar quantity.
Its SI unit is Nm−2 or pascal (Pa)
Dimensional formula is ML−1 T −2
A common unit of pressure is the atmosphere (atm). It is the pressure
exerted by the atmosphere at sea level.
1 atm = 1.013 × 𝟏𝟎𝟓 Pa.
Density
Density ρ for a fluid of mass m occupying volume V is given by
𝐦
ρ= 𝐕
It is a positive scalar quantity.
Its SI unit is kg m−3 .
The dimensions of density are [ML−3 ].
The density of water at 𝟒𝟎 C (277 K) is 1000 kg 𝐦−𝟑 .
A liquid is incompressible and its density is therefore, nearly constant at
all pressures. Gases, on the other hand exhibit a large variation in densities
with pressure.
Relative Density
The relative density of a substance is the ratio of its density to the density
of water at 40 C.
𝐃𝐞𝐧𝐬𝐢𝐭𝐲 𝐨𝐟 𝐬𝐮𝐛𝐬𝐭𝐚𝐧𝐜𝐞
Relative density=
𝐃𝐞𝐧𝐬𝐢𝐭𝐲 𝐨𝐟 𝐰𝐚𝐭𝐞𝐫 𝐚𝐭 𝟒𝟎 𝐂

It is a dimensionless positive scalar quantity.

Variation of Pressure with Depth

A fluid is at rest in a container. Consider a cylindrical element of fluid

having area of base A and height h.
In equilibrium, the resultant vertical forces should be balanced.
P2 A = P1 A+mg
P2 A - P1 A =mg
(P2 - P1 )A =mg
But m= ρV
V = hA
m=ρhA
(P2 - P1 )A = ρhA g
P2 - P1 = ρ gh

If the point 1 at the top of the fluid , which is open to the atmosphere, P1
may be replaced by atmospheric pressure (Pa ) and we replace P2 by P
Gauge pressure, 𝐏 - 𝐏𝐚 = ρ gh
The excess of pressure, P - Pa , at depth h is called a gauge pressure at that
point.
Absolute Pressure, 𝐏 = 𝐏𝐚 + ρ gh
Thus, the absolute pressure P, at depth below the surface of a liquid open
to the atmosphere is greater than atmospheric pressure by an amount ρgh.
Hydrostatic paradox.

The absolute pressure depends on the height of the fluid column and not
on cross sectional or base area or the shape of the container. The liquid
pressure is the same at all points at the same horizontal level (same
depth). The result is appreciated through the example of hydrostatic
paradox.
Example
What is the pressure on a swimmer 10 m below the surface of a lake?
h = 10 m
ρ = 1000 kg m−3 Take g = 10 m s−2
P = Pa + ρ gh
= 1.01 × 105 + 1000 × 10 × 10
= 1.01 × 105 + 1 × 105
= 2.01 × 105 Pa
≈ 2 atm
(This is a 100% increase in pressure from surface level. At a depth of 1 km the increase in pressure
is 100 atm. Submarines are designed to withstand such enormous pressures.)

Atmospheric Pressure
It is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere at sea level.
The pressure of the atmosphere at any point is equal to the weight of a
column of air of unit cross sectional area extending from that point to the
top of the atmosphere.
1 atm = 1.013 × 𝟏𝟎𝟓 Pa
Mercury barometer
Mercury barometer is used to measure Atmospheric Pressure. Italian
scientist Evangelista Torricelli devised mercury barometer.

(The space above the mercury column in the

tube contains only mercury vapour whose
pressure P is so small that it may be neglected.)

The pressure inside the column at point A =The pressure at point B, which
is at the same level.
Pressure at B = Pa (atmospheric pressure)
Pressure at A = ρgh
Pa = ρgh
where ρ is the density of mercury and h is the height of the mercury
column in the tube.
At sea level h= 76 cm and is equivalent to 1 atm.
Open-tube manometer
An open-tube manometer is a used for measuring Guage pressure or
pressure differences.

It consists of a U-tube containing a suitable liquid i.e. a low density liquid

(such as oil) for measuring small pressure differences and a high density
liquid (such as mercury) for large pressure differences.
One end of the tube is open to the atmosphere and other end is connected
to the system whose pressure we want to measure .
The pressure at A = pressure at point B
P= Pa + ρ gh
P - 𝐏𝐚 = ρ gh
The gauge pressure is proportional to manometer height h.
Example
The density of the atmosphere at sea level is 1.29 kg/m3. Assume that it
does not change with altitude. Then how high would the atmosphere
extend
Pa = ρ gh
P
h= a
ρg
1.01×105
h=
1.29 × 9.8
h = 7989 m ≈ 8 km
Example
At a depth of 1000 m in an ocean (a) what is the absolute pressure?
(b) What is the gauge pressure? (c) Find the force acting on the window of
area 20 cm × 20 cm of a submarine at this depth, the interior of which is
maintained at sea-level atmospheric pressure.
(The density of sea water is 1.03 × 103 kg m−3 , g = 10m s −2 )
h = 1000 m , ρ = 1.03 × 103 kg m−3
(a) Absolute pressure, P = Pa + ρgh
= 1.01 × 105 + 1.03 × 103 × 10 × 1000
= 1.01 × 105 + 103 × 105
= 104.01 × 105 Pa
≈ 104 atm
(b) Gauge pressure , P −Pa = ρgh
= 1.03 × 103 × 10 × 1000
= 103 × 105 Pa
≈ 103 atm
(c)The pressure outside the submarine is P = Pa + ρgh and the pressure
inside it is Pa .
Hence, the net pressure acting on the window is gauge pressure, ρgh.
Since the area of the window is A = 0.04 m2 , the force acting on it is
F = Gauge Pressure x A
= 103 × 105 × 0.04
= 4.12 ×10 N
Pascal’s law for transmission of fluid pressure
Whenever external pressure is applied on any part of a fluid contained in a
vessel, it is transmitted undiminished and equally in all directions.

Applications of Pascal’s law

1.Hydraulic lift
The pressure on smaller piston
F1
P= --------------(1)
A1
This pressure is transmitted equally to the larger cylinder with a larger
piston of area A2 producing an upward force F2 .
F2
P= --------------(2)
A2
F1 F2
From eq(1) and (2) =
A1 A2
𝐀𝟐
𝐅𝟐 = 𝐅𝟏 𝐀𝟏
A2
Thus, the applied force has been increased by a factor of and this factor
A1
is the mechanical advantage of the device.
Example
Two syringes of different cross sections (without needles) filled with
water are connected with a tightly fitted rubber tube filled with water.
Diameters of the smaller piston and larger piston are 1.0 cm and 3.0 cm
respectively. (a) Find the force exerted on the larger piston when a force of
10 N is applied to the smaller piston. (b) If the smaller piston is pushed in
through 6.0 cm, how much does the larger piston move out?
A2
F2 = F1
A1
π x (1.5 x 10−2 )2
F2 = 10 x
π x (0.5 x 10−2 )2
= 10 x9
=90 N
(b) Volume covered by the smaller piston is equal to volume moved by the
larger piston.
L1 A1 = L2 A2

A1
L2 = L1
A2
2
−2 π x (0.5 x 10−2 )
= 6 x10 x =0.54m
π x (1.5 x 10−2 )2
= 6 x10−2 x0.111
= 0.67 x10−2 m
= 0.67cm
Example
In a car lift compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small piston having a
radius of 5.0 cm. This pressure is transmitted to a second piston of radius
15 cm . If the mass of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg, calculate F1 . What is
the pressure necessary to accomplish this task? (g = 9.8 ms −2 ).
A1
F1 = F2 ( )
A2
F2 = mg = 1350 x 9.8
=13230N
2
π x (5 x 10−2 )
F1 = 13230 x
πx (15 x 10−2 )2
25
= 13230 x
225
=1470 N
The air pressure that will produce this force is
F1
P=
A1
1470
P=
3⋅14 x (5 x 10−2 )2
5
=1.9 x10 Pa
2.Hydraulic brakes
When we apply a force on the pedal with our foot the master piston moves
inside the master cylinder, and the pressure caused is transmitted through
the brake oil to act on a piston of larger area. A large force acts on the
piston and is pushed down expanding the brake shoes against brake lining.
In this way a small force on the pedal produces a large retarding force on
the wheel.
The pressure set up by pressing pedal is transmitted equally to all
cylinders attached to the four wheels so that the braking effort is equal on
all wheels.
Streamline Flow (Steady Flow)
The study of the fluids in motion is known as fluid dynamics.
The flow of the fluid is said to be steady if at any given point, the velocity
of each passing fluid particle remains constant in time.
The velocity of a particular particle may change as it moves from one point
to another.
The path taken by a fluid particle under a steady flow is a streamline.
Streamline is defined as a curve whose tangent at any point is in the
direction of the fluid velocity at that point.
No two streamlines can cross, for if they do, an oncoming fluid particle can
go either one way or the other and the flow would not be steady.
Equation of Continuity

Consider a region of streamline flow of a fluid. The points P, R and Q are

planes perpendicular to the direction of fluid flow . The area of cross-
sections at these points are AP , AR , AQ and speeds of fluid particles are vP ,
vR and vQ .
The mass of fluid crossing at P in a small interval of time Δt = ρP AP vP Δt
The mass of fluid crossing at Q in a small interval of time Δt = ρQ AQ vQ Δt
The mass of fluid crossing at R in a small interval of time Δt = ρR AR vR Δt
The mass of liquid flowing out = The mass of liquid flowing in
ρP AP vP Δt = ρQ AQ vQ Δt = ρR AR vR Δt
If the fluid is incompressible ρP = ρQ = ρR
𝐀𝐏 𝐯𝐏 = 𝐀𝐐 𝐯𝐐 = 𝐀𝐑 𝐯𝐑
Av = constant
This is called the equation of continuity and it is a statement of
conservation of mass in flow of incompressible fluids.
Thus, at narrower portions where the streamlines are closely spaced,
velocity increases and its vice versa.
Turbulent Flow
Steady flow is achieved at low flow speeds. Beyond a limiting value, called
critical speed, the flow of fluid loses steadiness and becomes turbulent.

A jet of air striking a flat plate placed perpendicular to it is an example of

turbulent flow.
Bernoulli’s Principle
Bernoulli’s principle states that as we move along a streamline, the sum of
the pressure , the kinetic energy per unit volume and the potential energy
per unit volume remains a constant.
𝟏
𝐏 + 𝛒𝐯 𝟐 + 𝛒𝐠𝐡= constant
𝟐
The equation is basically the conservation of energy applied to non
viscous fluid motion in steady state.

Proof

Consider the flow of an ideal fluid in a pipe of varying cross section, from
region (1) to region (2). The fluid in the two region is displaced a length of
v1 Δt and v2 Δt in time Δt.

The total work done on the fluid is

W1 + W2 = P1 ΔV - P2 ΔV
𝐖𝟏 + 𝐖𝟐 = (𝐏𝟏 - 𝐏𝟐 )ΔV-------------(1)
Part of this work goes into changing the kinetic energy of the fluid, and
part goes into changing the gravitational potential energy.
The change in its kinetic energy is
𝟏
ΔK =. 𝐦(𝐯𝟐𝟐 − 𝐯𝟏𝟐 ) -------------(2)
𝟐
The change in gravitational potential energy is
ΔU= mg(𝐡𝟐 -𝐡𝟏 ) ----------------(3)
By work – energy theorem
W1 + W2 = ΔK + ΔU
Substituting from eq(1),(2) and (3)
𝟏
(𝐏𝟏 - 𝐏𝟐 )ΔV = 𝐦(𝐯𝟐𝟐 − 𝐯𝟏𝟐 )+ 𝐦𝐠(𝐡𝟐 -𝐡𝟏 )-------------(4)
𝟐

m=ρΔV
m
Divide each term by ΔV to obtain , ρ=
ΔV
1
P1 - P2 = ρ(v22 − v12 )+ ρg(h2 -h1 )
2
1 1
P1 – P2 = ρv22 − ρv12 + ρgh2− ρgh1
2 2
1 1
P1 + ρv12 + ρgh1 = P2 + ρv22 + ρgh2
2 2
𝟏
𝐏 + 𝟐 𝛒𝐯 𝟐 + 𝛒𝐠𝐡= constant----------(5)
This is Bernoulli’s theorem
When a fluid is at rest i.e. its velocity is zero everywhere, Bernoulli’s
equation becomes
𝐏𝟏 + 𝛒𝐠𝐡𝟏 =𝐏𝟐 + 𝛒𝐠𝐡𝟐
Note:-Bernoulli’s theorem is applicable only to the streamline flow of non
viscous and incompressible fluids.
Applications of Bernoulli’s Principle
1.Speed of Efflux: Torricelli’s Law
The word efflux means fluid outflow
Torricelli’s law states that the speed of efflux of fluid through a small hole
at a depth h of an open tank is equal to the speed of a freely falling body
i.e, √ 𝟐𝐠𝐡

Consider a tank containing a liquid of density ρ with a small hole in its side
at a height y1 from the bottom.
According to Bernoulli principle
1 1
P1 + ρv12 + ρgh1 = P2 + ρv22 + ρgh2
2 2

Consider regions 1 and 2

According to equation of continuity ,since (A2 >>A1 ), v2 = 0.
1
Pa + ρv12 + ρgy1 = P+ ρgy2
2
1
ρv12 = ρg(y2 − y1 ) + P − Pa
2
y2 − y1 = h
1
ρv12 = ρgh + P − Pa
2
2(P−Pa )
v12 = 2gh +
ρ
𝟐(𝐏−𝐏𝐚 )
𝐯𝟏 = √ 𝟐𝐠𝐡 + 𝛒

If the tank is open to the atmosphere, then P = Pa

𝐯𝟏 = √ 𝟐𝐠𝐡
This equation is known as Torricelli’s law.
This is the speed of a freely falling body.

2.Dynamic Lift
(i)Ball moving without spin:

The velocity of fluid (air) above and below the ball at corresponding
points is the same resulting in zero pressure difference. The air therefore,
exerts no upward or downward force on the ball.

(ii)Ball moving with spin:Magnus Effect

The ball is moving forward and relative to it the air is moving backwards.
Therefore, the relative velocity of air above the ball is larger and below it
is smaller. This difference in the velocities of air results in the pressure
difference between the lower and upper faces and there is a net upward
force on the ball. This dynamic lift due to spining is called Magnus effect.

(iii)Aerofoil or lift on aircraft wing

Aerofoil is a solid piece shaped to provide an upward dynamic lift when it

moves horizontally through air.
When the aerofoil moves against the wind, the orientation of the wing
relative to flow direction causes the streamlines to crowd together above
the wing more than those below it. The flow speed on top is higher than
that below it. There is an upward force resulting in a dynamic lift of the
wings and this balances the weight of the plane.

Viscosity
The internal frictional force that acts when there is relative motion
between layers of the liquid is called viscosity.
When liquid flows between a fixed and moving
glass plates, the layer of the liquid in contact with
top surface moves with a velocity v and the layer
of the liquid in contact with the fixed surface is
stationary. The velocities of layers increase
uniformly from bottom to the top layer.

When a fluid is flowing in a pipe or a tube, then

velocity of the liquid layer along the axis of the tube is
maximum and decreases gradually as we move
towards the walls where it becomes zero.
Coefficient of viscosity( 𝛈)

Due to viscous force, a portion of liquid, which at some instant has the
shape ABCD, take the shape of AEFD after short interval of time (Δt).
F
Shearing stress =
A
𝛥𝑥
Shearing strain =
𝑙
𝛥𝑥
( ) 𝛥𝑥 𝑣
𝑙
Strain rate= = =
𝛥𝑡 𝑙 𝛥𝑡 𝑙

The coefficient of viscosity( η)for a fluid is defined as the ratio of shearing

stress to the strain rate.
F
Shearing stress A
η= = 𝑣
Strain rate
𝑙
𝐅𝒍
𝛈=
𝐯𝐀
The SI unit of coefficient viscosity is poiseiulle (Pl).
Its other units are N s m−2 or Pa s.
The dimensions are [ML−1 T −1]

Generally thin liquids like water, alcohol etc. are less viscous than thick
liquids like coal tar, blood, glycerin etc.

The viscosity of liquids decreases with temperature while it increases in

the case of gases.

Stokes’ Law
Stokes’ law states that the viscous drag force F on a sphere of radius a
moving with velocity v through a fluid of coefficient of viscosity η is,

F = 6πηav
Terminal velocity
When an object falls through a viscous medium (raindrop in air), it
accelerates initially due to gravity. As the velocity increases, the retarding
force also increases. Finally when viscous force plus buoyant force
becomes equal to the force due to gravity(weight of the body), the net
force and acceleration become zero. The sphere (raindrop) then descends
with a constant velocity clalled terminal velocity.
Expression for Terminal velocity

Consider a raindrop in air. The forces acting on the drop are

4
1. Force due to gravity(weight,mg) acting downwards , FG = πa3 ρg
3
4 3
2. Buoyant force acting upwards, FB = πa σg
3
3. Viscous force, FV = 6πηav
In equilibrium,
4 4
6πηav + πa3 σg = πa3 gρ
3 3
4
6πηav = πa3 (ρ −σ)g
3
Terminal velocity ,
𝟐𝐚𝟐 (𝛒 −𝛔)𝐠
𝐯𝐭 =
𝟗𝛈
So the terminal velocity vt depends on the square of the radius of the
sphere and inversely on the viscosity of the medium.
Example
The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm falling through a
tank of oil at 200 C is 6.5 cm s−1 . Compute the viscosity of the oil at 200 C.
Density of oil is 1.5 × 103 kg m−3 , density of copper is 8.9 × 103 kg m−3 .
vt = 6.5 × 10−2 ms −1 ρ = 8.9 × 103 kg m−3
a = 2 × 10−3 m σ =1.5 ×103 kg m−3
g = 9.8m s −2 ,
 2a2 (ρ −σ)g
vt =
9η
2a2 (ρ −σ)g
η=
9vt
2
2 x (2 × 10−3 ) (8.9 × 103 −1.5 ×103 )x9.8
η=
9 x 6.5 × 10−2

η =9.9 × 10−1 kg m−1 s−1

Reynolds Number
Osborne Reynolds defined a dimensionless number, whose value gives
one an approximate idea whether the flow would be turbulent . This
number is called the Reynolds number( R e )
𝛒𝐯𝐝
𝐑𝐞 =
𝛈
where ρ is the density of the fluid ,v is the speed of fluid, d stands for the
dimension of the pipe, and η is the viscosity of the fluid.
R e <1000 – The flow is streamline or laminar.
R e > 2000 − The flow is turbulent .
R e between 1000 and 2000-The flow becomes unsteady .
▪ The critical value of Reynolds number at which turbulence sets, is
known as critical Reynolds number. Turbulence dissipates kinetic
energy usually in the fm of heat. Racing cars and planes are
engineered to precision in order to minimise turbulence.
▪ Turbulence is sometimes desirable. The blades of a kitchen mixer
induce turbulent flow and provide thick milk shakes as well as beat
eggs into a uniform texture.
Surface Tension
The free surface of a liquid possess some additional energy and it behaves
like a stretched elastic membrane. This phenomenon is known as surface
tension. Surface tension is concerned with only liquid as gases do not have
free surfaces.

Surface Energy
For a molecule well inside a liquid the net force on it is zero. But the
molecules on the surface have a net downward pull. So work has to be
done against this downward force and this work is stored as energy in
suface molecules. Thus, molecules on a liquid surface have some extra
energy in comparison to molecules in the interior,which is termed as
surface energy. A liquid thus tends to have the least surface area inorder
to reduce surface enegy.
Surface Energy and Surface Tension

Consider a horizontal liquid film ending in a movable bar. Due to surface

tension the bar is pulled inwards .
Inorder to keep the bar in its original position some work has to be done
against this inward full.
W = F x d----------(1)
This work done increases surface energy.
If the surface energy of the film is S per unit area, the extra area is 2d l
(film has two sides),
The extra surface energy = S x 2d l ------------(2)
The extra surface energy = work done
S x2dl =Fd
𝐅
S = 𝟐𝒍
This quantity S is the magnitude of surface tension.
Definition of Surface tension
Surface tension is a force per unit length (or surface energy per unit area)
acting in the plane of the interface between the plane of the liquid and any
other substance. It is the extra energy that the molecules at the interface
have as compared to the interior
Force
Surface Tension, S= Length
The SI Unit is Nm−1
Dimensional formula is MT −2
The value of surface tension depends on temperature.
The surface tension of a liquid decreases with temperature.
Some effects of surface Tension
▪ Oil and water do not mix.
▪ Water wets you and me but not ducks.
▪ Mercury does not wet glass but water sticks to it.
▪ Oil rises up a cotton wick, inspite of gravity.
▪ Sap and water rise up to the top of the leaves of the tree.
▪ Hairs of a paint brush do not cling together when dry and even when
dipped in water but form a fine tip when taken out of it.
Angle of Contact
The angle between tangent to the liquid surface at the point of contact and
solid surface inside the liquid is termed as angle of contact(θ)
The value of θ determines whether a liquid will spread on the surface of a
solid or it will form droplets on it.
When Angle of contact is Obtuse:

When θ is an obtuse angle(greater than 90) then molecules of liquids are

attracted strongly to themselves and weakly to those of solid, and liquid
then does not wet the solid.
Eg: Water on a waxy or oily surface, Mercury on any surface.
When Angle of contact is Acute:

When θ is an acute angle (less than 90), the molecules of the liquid are
strongly attracted to those of the solid and liquid then wets the solid.
Eg: Water on glass or on plastic, Kerosene oil on virtually anything .
Action Soaps and detergents
Soaps, detergents and dying substances are wetting agents. When they are
added the angle of contact becomes small so that these may penetrate well
and become effective.
Action of Water proofing agents
Water proofing agents are added to create a large angle of contact
between the water and fibres.
Drops and Bubbles
Why are small drops and bubbles spherical?
Due to surface tension ,liquid surface has the tendency to reduce surface
area. For a given volume sphere has minimum surface area. So small drops
and bubbles are spherical.
For large drops the effect of gravity predominates that of surface tension
and they get flattened.
Excess Pressure inside a spherical drop

Due to surface tension the liquid surface experiences an inward pull and
as a result the pressure inside a spherical drop is more than the pressure
outside. Due to this excess pressure let the radius of drop increase by Δr
Work done in expansion= Force x Displacement
= Excess pressure x Area x Displacement
W = (𝐏𝐢 - 𝐏𝐨 ) x 4π𝐫 𝟐 x Δr ------------------(1)
This workdone is equal to the increase in surface energy

Extra Surface energy = Surface tension x Increase in surface area

Increase in surface area of drop=4π(r + Δr)2 - 4πr 2
=4π (r 2 + 2rΔr + Δr 2 − r 2 )
=8πrΔr (neglecting higher order terms)
Extra surface energy = 𝐒 𝐱𝟖𝛑𝐫𝚫𝐫 ------------------(2)
The workdone = extra surface energy
(𝐏𝐢 - 𝐏𝐨 ) x 4π𝐫 𝟐 xΔr = 𝟖𝛑𝐫𝚫𝐫 𝐒 --------------(3)
𝟐𝐒
(𝐏𝐢 - 𝐏𝐨 ) = 𝐫
Excess Pressure Inside a Liquid Bubble
A bubble has two free surfaces.
2S
(Pi - Po ) = 2x
r
𝟒𝐒
(𝐏𝐢 - 𝐏𝐨 ) =
𝐫
Capillary Rise
Due to the pressure difference across a curved liquid-air interface, water
rises up in a narrow tube in spite of gravity. This is called capillary rise.

Consider a vertical capillary tube of circular cross section (radius a)

inserted into an open vessel of water.
The excess pressure on the concave meniscus
2S
(Pi - Po ) =
r
a
cosθ =
r
a
r=
cosθ
2S
(Pi - Po ) = a
cosθ

2Scosθ
(Pi - Po ) = ----------------(1)
a

Consider two points A and B in the same horizontal level i.e, the points are
at the same pressure.
Pressure at A = Pi
Pressure at B = Po + h ρ g
Pi =Po + h ρ g
Pi - Po = h ρ g----------------(2)
From eq(1) and (2)
2Scosθ
h ρ g=
a
𝟐𝐒𝐜𝐨𝐬𝛉
h= 𝛒 𝐠𝐚

Thus capillary rise is a consequence of surface tension.

Capillary rise is larger, for capillary tube with smaller radius a.
Note:
If the liquid meniscus is convex, as for mercury, angle of contact θ will be
obtuse . Then cos θ is negative and hence value of h will be negative. it is
clear that the liquid will lower in the capillary and this is called capillary
fall or capillary depression.

Example
Find the capillary rise when a capillary tube of radius 0.05 cm is dipped
vertically in water. Surface tension for water is 0.073N𝑚−1 .Density of
water is 1000 kg𝑚−3 .
2Scosθ
h= ρ ga

For water-glass angle of contact θ = 0, cos 0 =1

2S
h=
ρ ga
2𝑥 0.073
h=
1000 𝑥 9.8 𝑥 0.05 𝑥10−3

h= 2.98 x 10-2 m =2.8 cm

 Chapter 10
Thermal Properties of Matter
Temperature and Heat
Temperature
Temperature is a relative measure, or indication of hotness or coldness.
An object that has a higher temperature than another object is said to be
hotter.
SI unit of temperature is kelvin (K).
° C(degree celsius) , ° F(degree fahrenheit) are other
commonly used unit of temperature.
Heat
Heat is the form of energy transferred between two systems or a system
and its surroundings by virtue of temperature difference.
When the temperature of body and its surrounding medium are different,
heat transfer takes place between the system and the surrounding
medium, until the body and the surrounding medium are at the same
temperature.
The SI unit of heat energy is joule (J)
Measurement of Temperature
A measure of temperature is obtained using a thermometer.
Variation of the volume of a liquid with temperature is used as the basis
for constructing thermometers.
Mercury and alcohol are the liquids used in most liquid-in-glass
thermometers.
Comparison of the Kelvin, Celsius and Fahrenheit temperature scales.
 ▪ On Fahrenheit scale, there are 180 equal intervals between the ice
and steam points.
▪ On Celsius scale, there are 100 equal intervals between the ice and
steam points.
▪ On Kelvin scale, there are 100 equal intervals between the ice and
steam points.

A plot of Fahrenheit temperature (𝐭 𝐅 ) versus Celsius temperature (𝐭 𝐂 ).

Temperature on Fahrenheit scale and Celsius scales are related by

𝐭 𝐅 −𝟑𝟐 𝐭𝐂
=
𝟏𝟖𝟎 𝟏𝟎𝟎
Temperature on Kelvin and Celsius scales are related by
T = 𝐭 𝐂 + 273.15

Ideal-Gas Equation and Absolute Temperature

Boyle’s law
At constant temperature , the pressure of a quantity of gas is inversely
proportional to volume.
1
P∝
V
PV = constant. --------------(1)
Charles’ law
At constant pressure , the volume of a quantity of gas is directly
proportional to temperature .
V∝T
𝐕
= constant------------(2)
𝐓
Ideal gas law
Low density gases obey Boyle’s law and Charles’ law , which may be
combined into a single relationship.
Combining eq(1) and (2)
PV
= constant
T
For any quantity of any dilute gas the law can be generalised as
PV
= μR
T
𝐏𝐕= 𝛍𝐑𝐓
This is called ideal-gas equation
where, μ is the number of moles in the sample of gas.
R is called universal gas constant: R = 8.31 J mol−1 K −1

Pressure versus temperature curve of a low density gas kept at

constant volume
For ideal gas, PV= μRT
If volume of a gas is kept constant, it gives P ∝T. A plot of pressure versus
temperature gives a straight line in this case.

Absolute zero Temperature or Zero kelvin (OK)

The minimum temperature for an ideal gas is called Absolute temperature
or zero kelvin(OK). This temperature is found to be – 273.15 °C
It is obtained by extrapolating the straight line of Pressure – temperature
(at constant V) to the axis.
Thermal Expansion
The increase in the dimensions of a body due to the increase in its
temperature is called thermal expansion.
Three types of thermal expansions are
1.Linear expansion
2.Area expansion
3.Volume expansion
1.Linear Expansion
The expansion in length is called linear expansion.

If the substance is in the form of a long rod,

𝛥𝑙
The fractional change in length, ∝ ΔT.
𝑙
𝛥𝑙
= 𝛼𝑙 ΔT
𝑙

𝚫𝐥
𝜶𝒍 =
𝒍 𝚫𝐓
where 𝛼𝑙 is known as the coefficient of linear expansion and is
characteristic of the material of the rod.
▪ Metals expand more and have relatively high values of αl .
▪ Copper expands about five times more than glass for the same
rise in temperature.
2.Area Expansion
The expansion in area is called area expansion

ΔA
The fractional change in area, ∝ ΔT.
A
ΔA
= αa ΔT
A
𝚫𝐀
𝛂𝐚 =
𝐀 𝚫𝐓

where αa is known as the coefficient of area expansion .

3. Volume Expansion
The expansion in volume is called volume expansion

ΔV
The fractional change in volume, ∝ ΔT
V
ΔV
= αv ΔT
V
𝚫𝐕
𝛂𝐯 =
𝐕𝚫𝐓
where αv is known as the coefficient of volume expansion .
The value of αv for alcohol (ethyl) is more than mercury and it expands
more than mercury for the same rise in temperature.
Relation between 𝛂𝐥 and 𝛂𝐚
ΔA
αa =
A ΔT
ΔA = (𝑙 + 𝛥𝑙)2 - 𝑙2
ΔA =2 𝑙 Δ 𝑙 (Neglecting term (Δl)2 )
2
A= 𝑙
2 𝑙 𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑎 =
𝑙 2 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑎 = 2
𝑙 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝑙 𝛥𝑇
=𝛼𝑙
𝜶𝒂 = 𝟐 𝜶𝒍 ---------(1)
Relation between 𝛂𝐥 and 𝛂𝐯
ΔV
αv = VΔT
ΔV = (𝑙 + Δl)3 - 𝑙3
ΔV = 3 𝑙2 Δl (Neglecting terms (Δl)2and (Δl)3)
3
V=𝑙
3 𝑙 2 𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑣 = 𝑙 3 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑣 = 3 𝑙 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝑙 𝛥𝑇
= 𝛼𝑙
𝜶𝒗 = 𝟑 𝜶𝒍 -----------(2)
From eqs(1) and (2) 𝜶𝒍 : 𝜶𝒂 : 𝜶𝒗 = 𝟏: 𝟐: 𝟑
Thermal Expansion of Water(Or) Anomalous Behavour of Water

Water exhibits an anomalous behavour; it contracts on heating from 0 °C

to 4°C.When it is heated after 4°C ,it expands like other liquids. This means
that water has minimum volume and hence maximum density at 4 °C .

Why the bodies of water, such as lakes and ponds, freeze at the top first?
This is due to anomalous expansion of water. As a lake cools toward 4 °C,
water near the surface becomes denser, and sinks. Then the warmer, less
dense water near the bottom rises. When this layer cools below 4 °C, it
freezes, and being less dense, remain at the surfaces. Thus water bodies
freeze at the top first. Water at the bottom protects aquatic animal and
plant life.

The coefficient of volume expansion at constant pressure for an ideal gas

The ideal gas equation, PV = μRT ------------------(1)
At constant pressure, PΔV = μR ΔT
ΔV μR ΔT
=
V PV
μR 1
From eq(1), =
PV T
ΔV ΔT
=
V T
ΔV 1
=
VΔT T
𝟏
𝛂𝐯 = ( for an ideal gas at constant pressure)
𝐓
Thermal Stress
If the thermal expansion of a rod is prevented by fixing its ends rigidly,
the rod acquires a compressive strain. The corresponding stress set up in
the rod is called thermal stress.
Heat Capacity
Heat capacity (S) of a substance is the amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of the substance by one unit.
𝚫𝐐
S = 𝚫𝐓
Unit is JK −1
Heat capacity of a substance depends on its mass, temperature and the
nature of substance.
Specific Heat capacity
Specific heat capacity (s) of a substance is the amount of heat required to
raise the temperature of unit mass of the substance by one unit.
Heat capacity
Specific heat capacity =
mass
S
s=
m
ΔQ
but, S =
ΔT
𝟏 𝚫𝐐
s=
𝐦 𝚫𝐓
Unit is Jkg −1 K −1
It depends on the nature of the substance and its temperature. It is
independent of mass of the substance.
From above equation, the amount of heat,
𝚫𝐐 = m s 𝚫𝐓
Molar Specific Heat Capacity
Molar Specific heat capacity (C) of a substance is the amount of heat
required to raise the temperature of one mole of the substance by one
unit.
S
C=
m
𝟏 𝚫𝐐
C=
𝛍 𝚫𝐓
Unit is Jmol−1 K −1
It depends on the nature of the substance and its temperature. It is
independent of mass of the substance.
Specific Heat Capacities of Gases
As gas is compressible, heat transfer can be achieved by keeping either
pressure or volume constant. So gases have two types of molar specific
heat capacities.
Molar specific heat capacity at constant pressure 𝐂𝐩 and
Molar specific heat capacity at constant volume 𝐂𝐯
Molar Specific Heat Capacity at Constant Pressure 𝐂𝐩
Molar specific heat capacity at constant pressure of a substance is the
amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one mole of the
substance by one unit keeping its pressure constant.
𝟏 𝚫𝐐
𝐂𝐩 = (𝚫𝐓)
𝛍 𝐩
Molar specific heat capacity at constant volume 𝐂𝐯
Molar specific heat capacity at constant volume of a substance is the
amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one mole of the
substance by one unit keeping its volume constant.
𝟏 𝚫𝐐
𝐂𝐯 = (𝚫𝐓)
𝛍 𝐯
Water has the highest specific heat capacity compared to other substances.
Specific heat capacity of water is 4186 is J𝐤𝐠 −𝟏 𝐊 −𝟏
▪ For this reason water is used as a coolant in automobile
radiators as well as a heater in hot water bags.
▪ Owing to its high specific heat capacity, the water warms up
much more slowly than the land during summer and
consequently wind from the sea has a cooling effect.
In desert areas, the earth surface warms up quickly during the day and
cools quickly at night.

Calorimetry:Calorimetry means measurement of heat.

Calorimeter:A device in which heat measurement can be made is called a
calorimeter.
It consists a metallic vessel and stirrer of the same
material like copper or alumiunium. The vessel is
kept inside a wooden jacket which contains heat
insulating materials like glass wool etc. The outer
jacket acts as a heat shield and reduces the heat
loss from the inner vessel. There is an opening in
the outer jacket through which a mercury
thermometer can be inserted into the calorimeter.
Change of State
Matter normally exists in three states: solid, liquid, and gas.
A transition from one of these states to another is called a change of state.
The temperature of the system does not change during change of state.
Change of state from solid to liquid
The change of state from solid to liquid is called melting and from liquid
to solid is called fusion.
▪ Both the solid and liquid states of the substance coexist in thermal
equilibrium during the change of states from solid to liquid.
▪ The temperature at which the solid and the liquid states of the
substance in thermal equilibrium with each other is called its
melting point.
▪ Melting point decrease with increase in pressure . The melting point
of a substance at standard atomspheric pressure is called its normal
melting point.
Regelation

When the wire passes through the ice slab , ice

melts at lower temperature due to increase in
pressure. When the wire has passed, water
above the wire freezes again. This
phenomenon of refreezing is called regelation.

Skating is possible on snow due to the formation of water below the

skates. Water is formed due to the increase of pressure and it acts as a
lubricant.
The change of state from liquid to vapour
The change of state from liquid to vapour (or gas) is called vaporisation
and from vapour to liquid is called condensation.
▪ The temperature remains constant until the entire amount of the
liquid is converted into vapour
▪ The temperature at which the liquid and the vapour states of the
substance coexist is called its boiling point.
▪ The boiling point increases with increase in pressure and decreases
with decreases in pressure. The boiling point of a substance at
standard atmospheric pressure is called its normal boiling point.
▪ Cooking is difficult on hills. At high altitudes, atmospheric
pressure is lower, boiling point of water decreases as compared
to that at sea level.
▪ Boiling point is increased inside a pressure cooker by
increasing the pressure. Hence cooking is faster.
A plot of temperature versus time showing the changes in the
state of ice on heating.

Sublimation
The change from solid state to vapour state without passing through the
liquid state is called sublimation, and the substance is said to sublime.
Eg: Dry ice (solid CO2) , Iodine, Camphor
During the sublimation process both the solid and vapour states of a
substance coexist in thermal equilibrium.
Change of state
Solid to Liquid Melting
Liquid to Solid Fusion
Liquid to Gas Vaporisation
Gas to Liquid Condensation
Solid to Gas Sublimation
Latent Heat
The amount of heat per unit mass transferred during change of state of the
substance is called latent heat of the substance for the process.
The heat required during a change of state depends upon the heat of
transformation and the mass of the substance undergoing a change of
state.
Q =mL
𝐐
L=
𝐦
where L is known as latent heat and is a characteristic of the substance.
SI unit of Latent Heat is J k𝑔−1
The value of L also depends on the pressure. Its value is usually quoted at
standard atmospheric pressure
Latent Heat of Fusion (𝐋𝐟 )
The latent heat for a solid -liquid state change is called the latent heat of
fusion (𝐋𝐟 ) or simply heat of fusion.
Latent Heat of Vaporisation (𝐋𝐯 )
The latent heat for a liquid-gas state change is called the latent heat of
vaporisation (𝐋𝐯 ) or heat of vaporisation.
Temperature versus heat for water at 1 atm pressure (not to
scale).

The slopes of the phase lines are not same, which indicate that specific
heats of the various states are not equal.
When slope of graph is less, it indicates a high specific heat capacity .
▪ The specific heat capacity of water is greater than that of ice.
ΔQ = m s ΔT
The amount of heat required ,ΔQ in liquid phase will be greater than
that in solid phase for same ΔT.
So slope of liquid phase is less than that of solid phase.
▪ For water, the latent heat of fusion is 𝐋𝐟 = 3.33 × 105 J k𝑔−1 .
That is 3.33 × 105 J of heat are needed to melt 1 kg of ice at 0 °C.
For water, the latent heat of vaporisation is 𝐋𝐯 = 22.6 × 105 J k𝑔−1 .
That is 22.6 × 105 J of heat is needed to convert 1 kg of water to
steam at 100 °C.

Why burns from steam are usually more serious than those from
boiling water?
For water, the latent heat of vaporisation is 𝐋𝐯 = 22.6 × 105 J k𝑔−1 .
That is 22.6 × 105 J of heat is needed to convert 1 kg of water to steam at
100 °C. So, steam at 100 °C carries 22.6 × 105 J k𝑔−1 more heat than water
at 100 °C. This is why burns from steam are usually more serious than
those from boiling water.

Example
When 0.15 kg of ice at 0 °C is mixed with 0.30 kg of water at 50°C in a
container, the resulting temperature is 6.7 °C. Calculate the heat of fusion
of ice. (𝑠𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 = 4186 J k𝑔−1 𝐾 −1 )
 ΔQ = m s ΔT
Heat lost by water = m𝑠𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 (T𝑓 –T𝑖 )
= 0.30 x 4186 x (50.0 °C – 6.7 °C) = 54376.14 J
Heat required to melt ice = m L𝑓
= (0.15 kg) L𝑓
Heat required to raise temperature of ice water to final temperature
= m 𝑠𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 (T𝑓 –T𝑖 )
= 0.15 x 4186 x(6.7 °C – 0 °C) = 4206.93 J
Heat lost = heat gained
54376.14 J = (0.15 kg) L𝑓 + 4206.93 J
𝐋𝒇 = 3.34×105 J k𝒈−𝟏
Heat Transfer
There are three distinct modes of heat transfer :
conduction, convection and radiation

1.Conduction
Conduction is the mechanism of transfer of heat between two adjacent
parts of a body because of their temperature difference.
If one end of a metallic rod is heated , heat transfer takes place by
conduction from the hot end of the rod to the other end.
Consider a metallic bar of length L and uniform cross section A with its
two ends maintained at different temperatures TC and TD ; (TC > TD ).

The rate of flow of heat H is proportional to the temperature difference

(TC - TD ) and the area of cross section A and is inversely proportional to
the length L :
 𝐓𝐜 −𝐓𝐃
𝐇=𝐊𝐀 𝐋
The constant of proportionality K is called the thermal conductivity of the
material. The greater the value of K for a material, the more rapidly will it
conduct heat. The SI unit of K is Js−1 m−1 K −1 or Wm−1 K −1
▪ Gases are poor thermal conductors while liquids have conductivities
intermediate between solids and gases.
▪ Metals are good thermal conductors.
▪ Wood , glass and wool have small thermal conductivities.
▪ Some cooking pots have copper coating on the bottom. Being a good
conductor of heat, copper promotes the distribution of heat over the
bottom of a pot for uniform cooking.
▪ Plastic foams, on the other hand, are good insulators, mainly because
they contain pockets of air.
▪ Houses made of concrete roofs get very hot during summer days,
because thermal conductivity of concrete is moderately high.
Therefore, people usually prefer to give a layer of earth or foam
insulation on the ceiling so that heat transfer is prohibited and keeps
the room cooler.
2.Convection
Convection is a mode of heat transfer by actual motion of matter. It is
possible only in fluids.
Convection can be natural or forced.

Natural Convection
In natural convection, gravity plays an important part. When a fluid is
heated from below, the hot part expands and, therefore, becomes less
dense. Because of buoyancy, it rises and the upper colder part replaces it.
This again gets heated, rises up and is replaced by the colder part of the
fluid.Eg: Sea breeze, Land breeze, Trade wind

1.Sea breeze
During the day, the ground heats up more quickly than large water bodies.
This is due to greater specific heat capacity of water. The air in contact
with the warm ground is heated . It expands, becomes less dense and rises
. Then cold air above sea moves to fill this space and is called as sea
breeze .
2.Land breeze
At night, the ground loses its heat more quickly, and the water surface is
warmer than the land. The air in contact with water is heated. It expands,
becomes less dense and rises . Then cold air above the ground moves to
fill this space and is called as land breeze .

3.Trade wind
The surface of the earth at the equator is heated more by sun rays than
poles. The hot air at equator expands, becomes less dense and rises . Then
cold air from poles moves to the equator. This is called trade wind.
Forced Convection
In forced convection, material is forced to move by a pump or by some
other physical means.
Eg: Forced-air heating systems in home
The human circulatory system
The cooling system of an automobile engine.
In the human body, the heart acts as the pump that circulates blood
through different parts of the body, transferring heat by forced convection
and maintaining it at a uniform temperature.
3.Radiation
The mechanism for heat transfer which does not require a medium is
called radiation.
The electromagnetic radiation emitted by a body by virtue of its
temperature is called thermal radiation. The energy so radiated by
electromagnetic waves is called radiant energy. All bodies emit radiant
energy, whether they are solid, liquid or gases.
Heat is transferred to the earth from the sun through empty space as
radiation.
Black bodies absorb and emit radiant energy better than bodies of
lighter colours.
This fact finds many applications in our daily life.
▪ We wear white or light coloured clothes in summer so that they
absorb the least heat from the sun.
▪ During winter, we use dark coloured clothes which absorb heat from
the sun and keep our body warm.
▪ The bottoms of the utensils for cooking food are blackened so that
they absorb maximum heat from the fire and give it to the vegetables
to be cooked.
Principle of Thermo Bottles
Thermos bottle is a device to minimise heat transfer between the contents
of the bottle and outside. It consists of a double-walled glass vessel with
the inner and outer walls coated with silver. Radiation from the inner wall
is reflected back into the contents of the bottle. The outer wall similarly
reflects back any incoming radiation. The space between the walls is
evacuted to reduce conduction and convection losses and the flask is
supported on an insulator like cork. The device is, therefore, useful for
preventing hot contents from getting cold, or alternatively to store cold
contents (like ice).
Blackbody
An object that absorbs all radiations falling on it at all wavelength is called
a blackbody. A blackbody, also emits radiations of all possible wavelength.
Blackbody Radiation
The radiations emitted by blackbody are called blackbody radiations.
The variation of energy emitted by a blackbody with wavelength is is as
shown in figure:

Wien’s Displacement Law

The wavelength 𝛌𝐦 for which energy emitted by a blackbody is the
maximum , is inversely proportional to the temperarure.This is known as
𝟏
Wien’s Displacement Law. 𝛌𝐦 𝛂
𝐓
𝛌𝐦 𝐓 = constant
The constant is called Wien’s constant and its value is 2.9 x 𝟏𝟎−𝟑 mK.
Stefan-Boltzmann Law
The energy emitted by a perfect radiator (black body) per unit time is
given by 𝐇 = 𝐀𝛔𝐓 𝟒
This is called Stefan-Boltzmann Law.
where A - the area of the body
T - temperature of body
σ is called Stefan-Boltzmann constant
σ = 5.67 x10−8 Wm−2 K −4
▪ If the body is not a perfect radiator
𝐇 = 𝐀𝐞𝛔𝐓 𝟒
where e is the emissivity i.e, the ability to radiate.
For a perfect radiator,emissivity, e=1
▪ If T is the temperature of the body and Ts is the temperature of
surroundings, then rate of loss of radiant energy is
𝐇 = 𝐀𝐞𝛔 (𝐓 − 𝐓𝐬 )𝟒

Newton’s Law of Cooling

Newton’s Law of Cooling says that the rate of loss of heat(rate of cooling)
of a body is proportional the difference of temperature of the body and the
𝐝𝐐
surroundings. − = 𝐤(𝐓𝟐 − 𝐓𝟏 )
𝐝𝐓

Where T1 is the temperature of the surrounding medium

T2 is the temperature of the body
k is a positive constant depending upon the area and nature of the
surface of the body

Curve showing cooling of hot water with time.

 Chapter 11
Thermodynamics
Thermodynamics
Thermodynamics is a branch of physics which deals with the study of heat,
temperature and their inter conversion of heat energy into other forms of
energy.

Thermodynamic System
A thermodynamic system is a certain quantity of matter which is
separated from its surroundings by a real or imaginary boundary. This
system may be in solid , liquid or gaseous state.
Surroundings
Everything outside a thermodynamic system is its surrounding.

Boundary
The real or imaginary surface that separates the system from its
surroundings is called boundary.
Boundary can be of two types: Adiabatic , Diathermic
Adiabatic wall (boundary)
An insulating wall that does not allow flow of energy (heat) from one
system to another is called an adiabatic wall.

Diathermic wall
A conducting wall that allows energy flow (heat) from one system to
another is called a diathermic wall.

Thermodynamic State Variables

Every equilibrium state of a thermodynamic system is completely
described by specific values of some macroscopic variables. These are
called thermodynamic state variables.
Eg: pressure, volume, temperature, mass , composition,Entropy, Enthalpy
Thermodynamic Equilibrium
The state of a thermodynamic system is in equilibrium , if the macroscopic
variables that characterise the system do not change in time.
Eg: A gas inside a closed rigid container, completely insulated from its
surroundings, with fixed values of pressure, volume, temperature, mass
and composition that do not change with time, is in a state of
thermodynamic equilibrium.
Thermal equilibrium
A system is said to be in thermal equilibrium with itself if the temperature
of the system remains constant.
Two systems are said to be in thermal equilibrium, when there is no flow
of thermal energy between them ,when they are connected by a diathermic
wall. In thermal equilibrium, the temperatures of the two systems are
equal.
If systems A and B (two gases) are separated by an adiabatic wall that
does not allow flow of heat, system A will be in its own thermal
equilibrium, and system B also will be in its own thermal equilibrium. But
systems A and B will not be in thermal equilibrium with each other.

If the same systems A and B separated by a diathermic wall that allows

heat to flow from one to another, thermal equilibrium is attained between
the two systems in due course. In this case the temperature of the two
systems become equal.

Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics

R.H. Fowler formulated this law in 1931 long after the first and second
Laws of thermodynamics were stated and so numbered.
 Systems A and B are separated by an
adiabatic wall, while each is in contact with a
third system C via a conducting wall. In this
case A will be in thermal equilibrium with B.
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics states that
‘two systems in thermal equilibrium with a third system separately are in
thermal equilibrium with each other’.
Thus if A and B are separately in equilibrium with C, TA = TC and TB = TC .
This implies that TA = TB i.e. the systems A and B are also in thermal
equilibrium.
𝐢. 𝐞, 𝐈𝐟 𝐓𝐀 = 𝐓𝐂 and 𝐓𝐁 = 𝐓𝐂 then 𝐓𝐀 = 𝐓𝐁

The concept of temperature from Zeroth Law

The thermodynamic variable whose value is equal for two systems in
thermal equilibrium is called temperature (T ).
Heat, Internal Energy and Work
Heat and work are two modes of energy transfer to the system . (or )
Heat and work are two modes to change the internal energy of a system.
Heat and work are not thermodynamic state variables, but internal energy
is a thermodynamic state variable.

Internal Energy(U)
Internal energy of a system is the sum of kinetic energies and potential
energies of the molecular constituents of the system.
It does not include the over-all kinetic energy of the system.
Internal energy U of a system is an example of a thermodynamic ‘state
variable’ – its value depends only on the given state of the system, not on
the ‘path’ taken to arrive at that state.
Heat(Q)
Heat is energy transfer due to temperature difference between two
systems.
Heat is certainly energy, but it is the energy in transit.
Heat is not a thermodynamic state variable. its value depends on the ‘path’
taken to arrive a particular state.
Work (W)
Work is energy transfer brought about by means that do not involve such a
temperature difference(e.g. moving the piston by raising or lowering some
weight connected to it)
Work is not a thermodynamic state variable. its value depends on the
‘path’ taken to arrive a particular state.

First Law of Thermodynamics

The heat supplied supplied to the system is partly used to increase the
internal energy of the system and the rest is used to do work on the
environment .
ΔQ = ΔU + ΔW
ΔQ = Heat supplied to the system by the surroundings
ΔW = Work done by the system on the surroundings
ΔU = Change in internal energy of the system
▪ If work is done by the system against a constant pressure P ,then
ΔW = P ΔV (ΔW=F Δx=PA Δx=P ΔV)
ΔQ = ΔU + P ΔV
▪ If a system is taken through a process in which ΔU = 0
ΔQ = ΔW
Heat supplied to the system is used up entirely by the system in
doing work on the environment.
Eg: Isothermal expansion of an ideal gas
▪ From the First Law of Thermodynamics,
ΔQ - ΔW = ΔU
As ΔU is path independent ( ΔQ - ΔW )should also be path
independent.
i.e., eventhough ΔQ and ΔW are path dependent, their combination
ΔQ – ΔW, is path independent.

Specific Heat Capacities of Gases

As gas is compressible, heat transfer can be achieved by keeping either
pressure or volume constant. So gases have two types of molar specific
heat capacities.
 Molar specific heat capacity at constant pressure Cp
𝟏 𝚫𝐐
𝐂𝐩 = 𝛍 (𝚫𝐓)
𝐩

Molar specific heat capacity at constant volume Cv

𝟏 𝚫𝐐
𝐂𝐯 = 𝛍 (𝚫𝐓)
𝐯

Relation connecting 𝐂𝐩 and 𝐂𝐯 − Mayer’s relation

First law of thermodynamics , ΔQ = ΔU + P ΔV
If ΔQ is absorbed at constant volume, ΔV = 0
ΔQ = ΔU
ΔQ
Cv = ( ) (for 1 mole)
ΔT v
ΔU
Cv = ( ) (U depends only on T .So subscript V can be omitted)
ΔT v
𝚫𝐔
𝐂𝐯 = 𝚫𝐓 ---------(1)
If, on the other hand, ΔQ is absorbed at constant pressure,

ΔQ = ΔU + P ΔV
ΔQ
Cp = ( )
ΔT p
ΔU ΔV
Cp = ( ) + (P ΔT) (U depends only on T .So subscript P can be omitted)
ΔT p p

𝚫𝐔 𝚫𝐕
𝐂𝐩 = 𝚫𝐓+ (𝐏 𝚫𝐓) ------------(2)
𝐩

Now, for a mole of an ideal gas

PV = RT
ΔV ΔT
P ( ) =R( )
ΔT ΔTp
ΔV
P ( ) =R
ΔT p
ΔU
Cp = +R
ΔT

Substituting from eq(1) Cp = Cv +R

𝐂𝐩 − 𝐂𝐯 = 𝐑
This is called Mayer’s relation.
𝐂𝐩 𝐢𝐬 𝐚𝐥𝐰𝐚𝐲𝐬 𝐠𝐫𝐞𝐚𝐭𝐞𝐫 𝐭𝐡𝐚𝐧 𝐂𝐯 . Why
𝚫𝐔
From eqns (1) and (2) 𝐂𝐯 =
𝚫𝐓
𝚫𝐔 𝚫𝐕
𝐂𝐩 = + (𝐏 )
𝚫𝐓 𝚫𝐓 𝐩

When gas is heated at constant volume, the entire heat is used to increase
the internal energy of the gas. But when the gas is heated at constant
pressure, the heat is used to increase the internal energy and also to do
𝚫𝐔
external work during expansion. is the same in both cases. Hence 𝐂𝐩 is
𝚫𝐓
greater than 𝐂𝐯 .
Thermodynamic State Variables and Equation of State
Every equilibrium state of a thermodynamic system is completely
described by specific values of some macroscopic variables, also called
state variables.
For example, an equilibrium state of a gas is completely specified by the
values of pressure, volume, temperature, and mass (and composition if
there is a mixture of gases).
Equation of state
The connection between the state variables is called the equation of state.
Eg: For an ideal gas, the equation of state is the ideal gas relation
PV=μRT
Extensive and Intensive Variables
The thermodynamic state variables are of two kinds:
Extensive and Intensive.
Extensive Variables
Extensive variables indicate the ‘size’ of the system.
(If we imagine ,to divide a system in equilibrium into two equal parts, the
variables whose values get halved in each part are extensive.)
Eg:Internal energy, Volume , Mass
Intensive Variables
Intensive variables do not indicate the ‘size’ of the system.
(If we imagine, to divide a system in equilibrium into two equal parts, the
variables that remain unchanged for each part are intensive.)
Eg: Pressure, Temperature , Density
Thermodynamic Process
A thermodynamic process is defined as a change from one equilibrium
state to another.
Quasi-static process
The name quasi-static means nearly static.
A quasi-static process is an infinitely slow process such that the system
remains in thermal and mechanical equilibrium with the surroundings
throughout.
In a quasi-static process, the pressure and temperature of the environment
can differ from those of the system only infinitesimally.
Eg: Processes that are sufficiently slow and do not involve accelerated
motion of the piston, large temperature gradient, etc. are reasonably
approximation to an ideal quasi-static process.
Some special thermodynamic processes

Isothermal process.
A process in which the temperature of the system is kept fixed throughout
is called an isothermal process.
For isothermal process T = constant .
So internal energy does not change, ΔU=0
▪ Eg: Change of state (Melting, fusion, vaporistion..)
▪ The expansion of a gas in a metallic cylinder placed in a large
reservoir of fixed temperature is an example of an isothermal
process.

Equation of state for an isothermal process

For an ideal gas, PV=μRT
If an ideal gas goes isothermally from its initial state to the final state , its
temperature remains constant
PV = constant
This is the equation of state for an isothermal process.
Work done by an ideal gas during an isothermal process
Consider an ideal gas undergoes a change in its state isothermally (at
temperature T) from (P1 ,V1 ) to the final state (P2 , V2 ).
ΔW = P ΔV
In the limit ΔV → 0
dW = P dV

v
W =∫v 2 P dV
1
P V = μ R T (for 1 mole)
μR T
P=
V
v μR T
W =∫v 2 dV
1 V
v 1
W =μ R T ∫v 2 dV
1 V

v
W = μR T [ln V]v21
W = μR T [ln V2 − ln V1 ]
𝐕
W = 𝛍𝐑𝐓 𝐥𝐧 [ 𝟐 ]
𝐕𝟏
Isothermal expansion,
For Isothermal expansion, V2 > V1 and hence W > 0 (workdone is
positive)
That is, in an isothermal expansion, the gas absorbs heat and work is done
by the gas on the environment.
Isothermal compression
In isothermal compression V2 < V1 and hence W < 0 (workdone is
negative)
That is, In an isothermal compression, work is done on the gas by the
environment and heat is released.

The First Law of Thermodynamics for an isothermal change

For isothermal process ΔU= 0
First Law of Thermodynamics ΔQ = ΔU + ΔW
ΔQ = ΔW
The heat absorbed by the gas is entirely used to do the work on the
environment.

Adiabatic process
In an adiabatic process, the system is insulated from the surroundings and
heat absorbed or released is zero.
ΔQ=0
Equation of state for an adiabatic process
P𝐕 𝛄 = constant
Or T 𝐕 𝛄−𝟏 = constant
where γ is the ratio of specific heats (ordinary or molar) at constant
𝐂𝐩
pressure and at constant volume. 𝛄=𝐂
𝐯
Workdone by an Ideal gas during an Adiabatic Process
Consider an ideal gas undergoes a change in its state adiabatically from
(P1 ,V1 ) to the final state (P2 , V2 ).
v
W =∫v 2 P dV
1
PV γ = k
k
P= γ
V

P=k V −γ
v
W = k ∫v 2 V −γ dV
1
v2
V−γ+1
W = k[ ]
−γ+1 v
1
k −γ+1
W= [v − v1 −γ+1 ]
1−γ 2
1 k k
W= [ γ−1 − ]
1−γ v2 v1 γ−1
PV γ = k
P1 V1 γ = P2 V2 γ=k
1 P2 V2 γ P1 V1 γ
W= [ − ]
1−γ v2 γ−1 v1 γ−1
𝟏
W= [ 𝐏𝟐 𝐕𝟐 − 𝐏𝟏 𝐕𝟏 ]
𝟏−𝛄
PV=μRT
1
W= [ μ R T2 − μ R T1 ]
1−γ
𝛍𝐑
W = 𝟏−𝛄 [ 𝐓𝟐 − 𝐓𝟏 ]
Or
𝛍𝐑
W = 𝛄−𝟏 [ 𝐓𝟏 − 𝐓𝟐 ]
Adiabatic expansion
In adiabatic expansion, the work is done by the gas (W > 0), we get T2 <
T1 i.e., the temperature of the gas lowers.
Adiabatic compression
In Adiabatic compression, work is done on the gas (W < 0), we get T2 >
T1 . i.e., the temperature of the gas rises.
First law of thermodynamics for an adiabatic process
Δ Q= ΔU+ ΔW
For adiabatic process, Δ Q=0
ΔW = -ΔU
i.e., Workdone = - change in internal energy

Isochoric process
In an isochoric process, V is constant.

Workdone in an isochoric process

Δ W=P ΔV
For isochoric process, ΔV =0
Δ W =0
In an isochoric process no work is done on or by the gas.

First law of thermodynamics for an isochoric process

Δ Q= ΔU+ ΔW
For isochoric process, Δ W =0
Δ Q= ΔU
The heat absorbed by the gas goes entirely to change its internal energy
and thereby its temperature.

Isobaric Process
In an isobaric process, P is constant.

Work done by the gas in an Isobaric process

Work done by the gas is
Δ W=P ΔV
W = P (𝐕𝟐 − 𝐕𝟏 )
W= μ R (𝐓𝟐 − 𝐓𝟏 )

First Law of Thermodynamics for an Isobaric Process

Since temperature changes, internal energy also changes. The heat
absorbed goes partly to increase internal energy and partly to do work.
Δ Q= ΔU+ ΔW
Cyclic Process
In a cyclic process, the system returns to its initial state.
Since internal energy is a state variable, ΔU = 0 for a cyclic process
First Law of Thermodynamics for Cyclic Process
Δ Q= ΔU+ ΔW
ΔU = 0
Δ Q= ΔW
The total heat absorbed equals the work done by the system.

P-V curves for isothermal and adiabatic processes of an ideal gas.

Second Law of Thermodynamics

Kelvin-Planck statement
No process is possible whose sole result is the absorption of heat from a
reservoir and the complete conversion of the heat into work.
Clausius statement
No process is possible whose sole result is the transfer of heat from a
colder object to a hotter object.
The two statements above are completely equivalent

Reversible and Irreversible Processes

Reversible Processes
A thermodynamic process is reversible if the process can be turned back
such that both the system and the surroundings return to their original
states, with no other change anywhere else in the universe.
Eg: A quasi-static isothermal expansion of an ideal gas in a cylinder
fitted with a frictionless movable piston is a reversible process.
A process is reversible only if:
1) It is quasi-static i.e., the system in equilibrium with the surroundings
at every stage.
2) There are no dissipative factors such as friction, viscosity, etc.
Irreversible Processes
A thermodynamic process is irreversible if the process cannot be turned
back such that both the system and the surroundings return to their
original states, with no other change anywhere else in the universe.
The spontaneous processes of nature are irreversible.
 ▪ Eg:The free expansion of a gas
▪ The combustion reaction of a mixture of petrol and air ignited by a
spark .
▪ Cooking gas leaking from a gas cylinder in the kitchen diffuses to the
entire room. The diffusion process will not spontaneously reverse
and bring the gas back to the cylinder.

Irreversibility of a process arises due to:

1) Many processes take the system to non-equilibrium states.
2) Most processes involve friction, viscosity and other dissipative
effects.

Carnot Engine
Sadi Carnot, a French engineer, developed Carnot engine. Carnot engine is
a reversible engine operating between two temperatures T1 (source) and
T2 (sink). The working substance of the Carnot engine is an ideal gas.

Carnot cycle

The four processes involved

in carnot cycle are
1.Isothermal Expansion
2. Adiabatic Expansion
3. Isothermal Compression
4. Adiabatic Compression

Workdone in a Carnot cycle

(a)Step 1 →2 Isothermal expansion of the gas from (𝐏𝟏, 𝐕𝟏, 𝐓𝟏 ) to (𝐏𝟐, 𝐕𝟐, 𝐓𝟏 ).
Since the process is isothermal
The workdone (W1→2 ) =Heat absorbed (Q1 )
Work done by the gas,
𝐕
𝐖𝟏→𝟐 = 𝐐𝟏 = μ 𝐑𝐓𝟏 𝐥𝐧 ⌊ 𝟐⌋ ------------(1)
𝐕𝟏
(b) Step 2 → 3 Adiabatic expansion of the gas from (𝐏𝟐 ,𝐕𝟐 ,𝐓𝟏 ) to (𝐏𝟑 , 𝐕𝟑 , 𝐓𝟐 ).
Work done by the gas,
𝛍𝐑
𝐖𝟐→𝟑 = [ 𝐓𝟏 − 𝐓𝟐 ] ------------------(2)
𝛄−𝟏

(c)Step 3→4 Isothermal compression of the gas from(𝐏𝟑 ,𝐕𝟑 ,𝐓𝟐 ) to (𝐏𝟒 ,𝐕𝟒 ,𝐓𝟐 ).
The workdone (W3→4 ) =Heat released (Q 2 )
Work done on the gas,
𝐕
𝐖𝟑→𝟒 = 𝐐𝟐 = μ 𝐑𝐓𝟐 𝐥𝐧 ⌊ 𝟒⌋
𝐕𝟑
𝐕
𝐖𝟑→𝟒 = 𝐐𝟐 = − μ 𝐑𝐓𝟐 𝐥𝐧 ⌊ 𝟑⌋ -----------(3)
𝐕𝟒

(d) Step 4 → 1 Adiabatic compression of the gas from (𝐏𝟒 ,𝐕𝟒 ,𝐓𝟐 ) to (𝐏𝟏 ,𝐕𝟏 , 𝐓𝟏 )
Work done on the gas is,
𝛍𝐑
𝐖𝟒→𝟏 = [𝐓𝟐 − 𝐓𝟏 ]
𝛄−𝟏

𝛍𝐑
𝐖𝟒→𝟏 =− [𝐓𝟏 − 𝐓𝟐 ] -----------------(4)
𝛄−𝟏

Total work done by the gas in one complete cycle is

W= W1→2 + W2→3 + W3→4 + W4→1
V μR V μR
W= μ RT1 ln ⌊ 2 ⌋ +γ−1 [ T1 − T2 ] − μ RT2 ln ⌊V3 ⌋ − γ−1 [ T1 − T2 ]
V1 4
𝐕𝟐 𝐕𝟑
W= μ 𝐑𝐓𝟏 𝐥𝐧 ⌊ ⌋ − μ 𝐑𝐓𝟐 𝐥𝐧 ⌊ ⌋ -------------(5)
𝐕𝟏 𝐕𝟒

Efficiency of Carnot Engine

Q2
η=1−
Q1

V
μ RT2 ln⌊V3 ⌋
4
η=1− V2
μ RT1 ln⌊V ⌋
1
V3 V2
As the two processes involved are adiabatic ,we get =
V4 V1

𝐓
𝛈 = 𝟏 − 𝐓𝟐
𝟏
𝐓𝟏 − 𝐓𝟐
𝛈= 𝐓𝟏
Carnot’s theorem
(a) working between two given temperatures T1 and T2 of the hot and cold
reservoirs respectively, no engine can have efficiency more than that of the
Carnot engine
(b) the efficiency of the Carnot engine is independent of the nature of the
working substance.
Example
Calculate the efficiency of a heat engine working between steam point and
ice point. Can you design an engine of 100% efficiency.
Steam point , T1 =1000 C =100+273=373K
Ice point , T2 = 00 C = 0+273=273K
T1 − T2
η=
T1
373− 273
η= = 0.268
373

𝛈 = 𝟐𝟔. 𝟖%

An ideal engine with η = 1 or (100% ) efficiency is never possible, even if

we can eliminate various kinds of losses associated with actual heat
engines.
 Chapter 12
Kinetic Theory
Introduction
Kinetic theory explains the behaviour of gases based on the idea that the
gas consists of rapidly moving atoms or molecules. The kinetic theory was
developed in the nineteenth century by Maxwell, Boltzmann and others.

Behaviour of Gases
Ideal gas equation
Gases at low pressures and high temperatures much above that at which
they liquefy (or solidify) approximately satisfy a simple relation
PV = μ RT------------(1)
where μ is the number of moles
R is universal gas constant.
R = 8.314 J mol−1 K −1
T is absolute temperature.
A gas that satisfies this eqn exactly at all pressures and temperatures is
defined to be an ideal gas.
But R = 𝐍𝐀 𝐤 𝐁
NA is Avogadro number
k B is Boltzmann constant
k B = 1.38 × 10−23 J K −1

PV = μ𝐍𝐀 𝐤 𝐁 T
μNA = N
N is the number of molecules of
gas
The perfect gas equation canalso be written as
PV = N𝐤 𝐁 T -------------(2)

PV
From above eq , = constant
T
From graph it is clear that real gases approach ideal gas behaviour at low
pressures and high temperatures.
At low pressures or high temperatures the molecules are far apart and
molecular interactions are negligible. Without interactions the gas behaves
like an ideal one.
Boyle’s Law
PV = μ RT
If we fix μ and T,
PV = Constant
𝟏
P∝
𝐕
i.e., for a fixed temperature , pressure of a given mass of gas varies
inversely with volume. This is the famous Boyle’s law.
Charles’Law
PV = μ RT
If we fix P
𝐕
= 𝐜𝐨𝐧𝐬𝐭𝐚𝐧𝐭
𝐓
V∝T
i.e., for a fixed pressure, the volume of a gas is proportional to its absolute
temperature T (Charles’ law).
Dalton’s law of partial pressures.
Consider a mixture of non-interacting ideal gases μ1 moles of gas 1, μ2
moles of gas 2, etc
PV =(μ1 + μ2 +… ) RT
RT RT
P= μ1 V +μ2 V + …………..
P =𝐏𝟏 +𝐏𝟐 + …………….
Thus, the total pressure of a mixture of ideal gases is the sum of partial
pressures. This is Dalton’s law of partial pressures.
Kinetic Theory of an Ideal Gas
▪ A given amount of gas is a collection of a large number of molecules
that are in random motion.
▪ At ordinary pressure and temperature, the average distance between
molecules is very large compared to the size of a molecule (2 Å).
▪ The interaction between the molecules is negligible.
▪ The molecules make elastic collisions with each other and also with
the walls of the container .
▪ As the collisions are elastic , total kinetic energy and total momentum
are conserved .
Pressure of an Ideal Gas

A gas is enclosed in a cube of side 𝑙

Consider a molecule moving in positive x direction makes an elastic
collision with the wall of thecontainer.
Momentum before collision = mvx
Momentum after collision = −mvx
The change in momentum of the molecule = −mvx −mvx
= −2 mvx
By the principle of conservation of momentum
Momentum imparted to wall in the collision = 2mvx
Distnace travelled by the molecule in time Δt = vx Δt
Volume covered by the molecule = Avx Δt
No of molecules in this volume = n Avx Δt
(n is number density of molecules)
Only half of these molecules move in +x direction
1
No of molecules = 2 nA vx Δt

The number of molecules with velocity vx hitting the wall in time Δt

1
= nA vx Δt
2
The total momentum transferred to the wall
1
Q = (2mvx ) ( nA vx Δt )
2
2
Q = nmAvx Δt
Q
The force on the wall, F =
Δt
F = nmAvx 2
F
Pressure, P =
A
P = nmvx 2
All molecules in a gas do not have the same velocity; so average velocity is
to be taken
P= nmv̅̅̅2
x
v̅̅̅2 = v̅̅̅
2 ̅̅̅2 ̅̅̅2
x + vy + vz
̅̅̅
vx2 = v̅̅̅y2 = v̅̅̅
2
z
̅̅̅
v 2 = 3 ̅̅̅ vx2
̅̅̅ 1 2
vx2 =3 ̅̅̅
v
2 1 ̅̅̅
but v̅̅̅ 2
x = v
3
𝟏
̅̅̅𝟐
P= nm𝐯
𝟑
Kinetic Interpretation of Temperature
1
P= nmv̅̅̅2
3
1
PV= nVmv̅̅̅2
3
N
n= , N=nV
V
1
PV= Nmv̅̅̅2
3
where N is the number of molecules in the sample.
2 1
PV= (N mv̅̅̅2 )
3 2
The quantity in bracket is the average translational kinetic energy of the
molecules in the gas.
1
N mv̅̅̅2 =E
2
2
PV= E---------------------(1)
3
Ideal gas equation, PV =Nk B T -------------------(2)
2
From eq(1)and (2) E = Nk B T
3
3
E = Nk B T
2
𝟑
E/N = 𝟐 𝐤 𝐁 T
The average kinetic energy of a molecule is proportional to the absolute
temperature of the gas; it is independent of pressure, volume or the nature
of the ideal gas.
Note:
This is a fundamental result relating temperature( a macroscopic
measurable parameter) to the average kinetic energy(microscopic
quantity) of a gas molecule. The two domains are connected by the
Boltzmann constant.

Root Mean Square (rms) Speed

3
E/N = k B T
2
1 3
mv̅̅̅2 = k B T
2 2
3kB T
v̅̅̅2 =
m
The square root of v̅̅̅2 is known as root mean square (rms) speed and is
denoted by vrms
𝟑𝐤 𝐁 𝐓
𝐯𝐫𝐦𝐬 = √
𝐦
Degrees f Freedom
The total number of independent ways in which a system can possess
energy is called degree of freedom.
A molecule has one degree of freedom for motion in a line.
Two degrees of freedom for motion in a plane.
Three degrees of freedom for motion in space.
Law of Equipartition of Energy
Law of Equipartition of Energy states that, in equilibrium, the total energy
is equally distributed in all possible energy modes, with each mode having
𝟏
an average energy equal to 𝐤 𝐁 T
𝟐
1
▪ Each translational degree of freedom contributes k B T
2
1
▪ Each rotational degree of freedom contributes k B T
2
1
▪ Each vibrational degree of freedom contributes , 2 𝑥 kBT = kBT
2
as a vibrational mode has both kinetic and potential energy modes.
Specific Heat capacity
Specific Heat capacities of Monoatomic Gases
The molecule of a monatomic gas has only 3 translational degrees of
freedom.
1 3
Average energy of a molecule =3 𝑥 kBT = kB T
2 2

The total internal energy of a mole of such a gas is,

3
U= k B T x NA
2

k B NA =R
3
U = RT
2

Specific heat capacity at constant volume

dU
Cv =
dt
d 3
= (2 RT)
dT

𝟑
𝐂𝐕 = R
𝟐

For an ideal gas, CP – CV = R (Mayer’s relation)

Specific heat capacity at constant pressure,

CP = C V + R
3
= R +R
2

𝟓
𝐂𝐏 = 𝟐 R
The ratio of specific heats
5
CP R
2
= γ = 3
CP R
2

𝟓
Adiabatic constant , 𝛄=
𝟑
Specific heat capacities of Diatomic Gases
Rigid diatomic molecule
A diatomic rigid rotator has , 3 translational and 2 rotational degrees of
freedom.i.e.,
1
Average energy of a molecule = 5 x k B T
2
5
= kB T
2

The total internal energy of a mole of such a gas is,

5
U= k B T x NA
2

k B NA =R
5
U = RT
2

Specific heat capacity at constant volume

dU
Cv =
dt
d 5
= (2 RT)
dT

𝟓
𝐂𝐕 = R
𝟐
For an ideal gas, CP – CV = R (Mayer’s relation)
Specific heat capacity at constant pressure,
CP = C V + R
5
= 2 R +R
𝟕
𝐂𝐏 = R
𝟐
The ratio of specific heats
7
CP R
2
=γ= 5
CP R
2

𝟕
Adiabatic constant , 𝛄=
𝟓
Non Rigid Diatomic Molecule
A non rigid diatomic molecule has , 3 translational , 2 rotational and
1 vibrational degrees of freedom.
1
(Each vibrational degree of freedom contributes ,2x k B T =k B T)
2
5
Average energy of a molecule = k B T + k B T
2
7
= kBT
2

The total internal energy of a mole of such a gas is,

7
U= k B T x NA
2

k B NA =R
𝟕
U = 𝟐 RT
Specific heat capacity at constant volume
dU
Cv =
dt
d 7
= (2 RT)
dT
𝟕
𝐂𝐕 = 𝟐 R
For an ideal gas, CP – CV = R (Mayer’s relation)
Specific heat capacity at constant pressure,
CP = C V + R
7
= R +R
2
𝟗
𝐂𝐏 = 𝟐 R
The ratio of specific heats
9
CP R
2
= γ = 7
CP R
2
𝟗
Adiabatic constant , 𝛄=
𝟕
Polyatomic Gases
A polyatomic molecule has 3 translational, 3 rotational degrees of freedom
and a certain number ( f ) of vibrational modes.
3 3
Average energy of a molecule = k B T + k B T +f k B T
2 2

The total internal energy of a mole of such a gas is,

3 3
U=( k B T + k B T + f k B T ) NA
2 2
( )
U= 3 + f k B TNA
k B NA =R
U=( 3 + f )RT
Specific heat capacity at constant volume
dU
Cv =
dt
𝐂𝐕 =( 𝟑 + 𝐟 )𝐑
Specific heat capacity at constant pressure,
CP = CV + R
=( 3 + f )R +R
𝐂𝐏 =( 𝟒 + 𝐟 )𝐑
The ratio of specific heats
CP ( 4+f )R
γ= =(
CP 3 +f )R
( 𝟒+𝐟 )
Adiabatic constant , 𝛄=(
𝟑 +𝐟 )
Specific Heat Capacity of Solids
Consider a solid of N atoms, each vibrating about its mean position.
1
A vibration in one dimension has average energy = 2x k B T
2
= kBT
In three dimensions, the average energy = 3k B T
The total internal energy of a mole of solid is,
U =3k B T x NA
k B NA =R
U =3RT
dU
Specific heat capacity C= dt
d
= (3 RT)
dT

𝐂 =𝟑𝐑
Mean Free Path
The mean free path 𝑙 is the average distance covered by a molecule
between two successive collisions.
𝟏
𝒍=
√𝟐𝐧𝛑𝐝𝟐

Consider the molecule of a gas as spheres of diameter d. Focus a single

molecule.
The volume swept by a molecule in time Δt in which any molecule
will collide with it = Area x distancd covered
= πd2 × 〈v〉Δt
The number of collisions suffered by the molecule in time Δt.
= nπ〈v〉d2 Δt
where n is the number of molecules per unit volume,

Rate of collision = nπ〈v〉d2

Time between two successive collisions is on the average,
1
τ=
nπ〈v〉d2
The average distance between two successive collisions, called the mean
free path 𝑙 , is
𝑙 = 〈v〉 τ
1
𝑙 = 〈v〉
nπ〈v〉d2
1
𝑙=
nπd2
As all molecules are moving , average relative velocity of the moleculesis to
be considered. So the exact equation is
𝟏
𝒍=
√𝟐𝐧𝛑𝐝𝟐
 Chapter 13
Oscillations
Non Periodic Motion
The motion which is non-repetitive .
e.g. rectilinear motion , motion of a projectile.
Periodic Motion
A motion that repeats itself at regular intervals of time is called periodic
motion.
e.g. uniform circular motion , orbital motion of planets in the solar system.
Oscillatory Motion
Periodic to and fro motion is called oscillatory motion.
e.g. motion of a cradle , motion of a swing, motion of the pendulum of a
wall clock.
Every oscillatory motion is periodic, but every periodic motion need not
be oscillatory.
Oscillations and Vibration
There is no significant difference between oscillations and vibrations.
▪ When the frequency is small, we call it oscillation.
e.g.The oscillation of a branch of a tree
▪ When the frequency is high, we call it vibration.
e.g. The vibration of a string of a musical instrument.

Period and frequency

Period (T)
The period T is the time required for one complete oscillation, or cycle.
Its SI unit is second.
Frequency
The frequency ν of periodic or oscillatory motion is the number of
oscillations per unit time.
It is the reciprocal of period .
𝟏
𝛎=
𝐓
The SI unit of ν is hertz ( Hz).
(In honor of the discoverer of radio waves, Heinrich Rudolph Hertz)
1Hz =1oscillation per second =1s−1
Example
On an average a human heart is found to beat 75 times in a minute.
Calculate its frequency and period.
75
The beat frequency of heart , ν =
1min
75
=
60 s

= 1.25 s−1 = 1.25 Hz

1
The time period ,T =
1.25

T = 0.8 s
Displacement

The distance from mean position is called displacement ( x)

At mean position displacement x= 0 and at extreme position x= ±𝑨
A is called amplitude of oscillation.
Amplitude
The maximum displacement from the mean poition is called amplitude
(A) of oscillation.

Mathematical Expression for Displacement

The displacement can be represented by a mathematical function of time.
It can be a sine function, cosine function or a linear combination of sine
and cosine functions.
f (t) = A cos ωt or
f (t ) = A sin ωt.
f (t) = A sin ωt + B cos ωt
Where A = Amplitude
ω=angular frequency
𝟐𝛑
ω= or ω= 𝟐𝛑𝛎
𝐓
Simple Harmonic Motion
Simple harmonic motion is the simplest form of oscillatory motion.

A particle is said to be in simple harmonic motion ,if the force acting on

the particle is proportional to its displacement and is directed towards the
mean position.
Mathematical expression for an SHM

Consider a particle vibrating back and forth about the origin of x-axis,
between the limits +A and –A.
If the motion is simple harmonic ,its position can be represented as a
function of time.
x (t) = A cos (ωt + 𝛟)

Phase
The time varying quantity, (ωt + ϕ), is called the phase of the motion.
It describes the state of motion at a given time.
Phase Constant
The constant ϕ is called the phase constant (or phase angle). The value
of ϕ depends on the displacement and velocity of the particle at t = 0.
The phase constant signifies the initial conditions.

A plot of displacement as a function of time for ϕ = 0.

x (t) = A cos (ωt )
The curves 1 and 2 are for two different amplitudes A and B.

The curve 3 , for ϕ = 0 , x (t) = A cos (ωt )

The curve 4 , for ϕ = -π/4 , x (t) = A cos (ωt - π/4)
The amplitude A is same for both the plots

Plots of for 𝛟 = 0 for two different periods.

Simple Harmonic Motion and Uniform Circular Motion

Consider a particle P in uniform circular motion.

The projection of particle along a diameter of the circle is x(t) .
x(t)
From figure, cos (ωt + ϕ) =
A
x(t) = A cos (ωt + 𝛟) -----------------(1)
 This equation represents a Simple Harmonic Motion.
i. e, the projection of uniform circular motion on a diameter of the circle is
in Simple Harmonic Motion.
Velocity in Simple Harmonic Motion

The speed of a particle v in uniform circular motion is its angular speed ω

times the radius of the circle A.
v=ωA
Its projection on the x-axis gives the velocity in SHM
v (t) = – ωA sin (ωt + 𝛟)
The negative sign appears because the velocity component of P is directed
towards the left, in the negative direction of x.
This equation expresses the instantaneous velocity of the particle P′
(projection of P). Therefore, it expresses the instantaneous velocity of a
particle executing SHM.

The velocity in SHM can also be obtained by differentiating x(t) with

respect to time .
d
v(t) = x(t)
dt
Acceleration in SHM

A particle executing a uniform circular motion is subjected to a radial

acceleration ,which is directed towards the centre.
a = ω2 A
Its projection on the x-axis gives the acceleration of SHM.
a(t) =– ω2 A cos (ωt + ϕ)
a(t) =– 𝛚𝟐 x -------------(3)
The acceleration, a(t), of the particle P′ is the projection of the acceleration
a of the reference particle P. It is an important result for SHM. It shows that
in SHM, the acceleration is proportional to the displacement and is always
directed towards the mean position.
The acceleration in SHM can also be obtained by differentiating v(t) with
respect to time
d
a(t) = v(t)
dt
The variation of particle displacement, velocity and acceleration in a
simple harmonic motion

• The particle velocity lags behind the displacement by a phase angle

of π/2; when the magnitude of displacement is the greatest, the
magnitude of the velocity is the least. When the magnitude of
displacement is the least, the velocity is the greatest.
• When the displacement has its greatest positive value, the
acceleration has its greatest negative value and vice versa. When the
displacement is zero, the acceleration is also zero.
Force Law for Simple Harmonic Motion
F = ma
a=– ω2 x
F = –m ω2 x
F = –kx -------------(4)
𝐤
Where k= m ω2 ; 𝛚𝟐 = 𝐦
𝐤
𝛚 = √𝐦
The force in SHM is proportional to the displacement and its direction is
opposite to the direction of displacement. Therefore, it is a restoring force.
Note:
▪ The centripetal force for uniform circular motion is constant in
magnitude, but the restoring force for SHM is time dependent.
▪ Since the force F is proportional to x such a system is also referred to
as a linear harmonic oscillator.
Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion
A particle executing simple harmonic motion has kinetic and potential
energies, both varying between the limits, zero and maximum.

Kinetic Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion

1
K = mv 2
2
1
K = mv 2
2
v= – ω√A2 − x 2
v 2 = ω2 (A2 − x 2 )
𝟏
K = 𝐦𝛚𝟐 (𝐀𝟐 − 𝐱 𝟐 ) ----------------(5)
𝟐
𝟏
• At mean position (x=0) , K = 𝐦𝛚𝟐 𝐀𝟐
𝟐
KE is maximum At Mean position
• At extreme position ( x=A) , K= 0.
KE is minimum At extreme positions.
Thus the kinetic energy of a particle executing simple harmonic motion is
periodic, with period T/2.
Potential Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion
1
U = kx 2
2
k= m ω2
𝟏
U =𝟐m𝛚𝟐 𝐱 𝟐 ----------------(6)
• At Mean position (x=0) ,U =𝟎
PE is minimum At Mean position
𝟏
• At Extreme position (x=A) , U = m𝛚𝟐 𝐀𝟐
𝟐
PE is maximum At extreme positions.
Thus the potential energy of a particle executing simple harmonic motion
is also periodic, with period T/2.
The Total Energy in SHM
E=U+K
1 1
E = mω2 x 2 + mω2 (A2 − x 2 )
2 2
1 1 1
E = mω2 x 2 + mω2 A2 − mω2 x 2
2 2 2
𝟏
E = 𝟐 m𝛚𝟐 𝐀𝟐 ---------------(7)
The total mechanical energy of a harmonic oscillator is a constant or
independent of time.
Variation of Potential energy , kinetic energy K and the total energy E with
time t for a linear harmonic oscillator

At what position the KE of a simple harmonic oscillator becomes equal to

its potential energy?
KE =PE
1 1
mω2 (A2 − x 2 ) = mω2 x 2
2 2
A − x = x2
2 2
2
A2 = 2x
2 A2 𝐀
x = , x=
2 √𝟐
Some Systems Executing Simple Harmonic Motion
There are no physical examples of absolutely pure simple harmonic
motion. In practice we come across systems that execute simple harmonic
motion approximately under certain conditions.

Oscillations due to a Spring

The small oscillations of a block of mass m fixed to a spring, is

fixed to a rigid wall is an example of SHM.
The restoring force F acting on the block is, F (x) = –k x
k, is called the spring constant.
A stiff spring has large k and a soft spring has small k.
Equation is same as the eqn for force in SHM and therefore the spring
executes a simple harmonic motion.
Period of Oscillations of a Spring
Restoring force, F = –k x
Where k= mω2
k
ω2 =
m

k
ω=√
m
2π 2π
Period, T= =
ω
√k
m

𝐦
T = 𝟐𝛑√ 𝐤
Example
A 5 kg collar is attached to a spring of spring constant 500 N 𝑚−1 . It slides
without friction over a horizontal rod. The collar is displaced from its
equilibrium position by 10.0 cm and released. Calculate
(a) the period of oscillation,
(b) the maximum speed and
(c) maximum acceleration of the collar.

(a) The period of oscillation as given by

m
T = 2π√
k

5
T = 2π√
500
1
T = 2x 3.14 x
10
= 0.63 s

(b) The velocity of the collar executing SHM is

v = – ω√A2 − x 2
Maximum speed, v= Aω (at mean position ,x=0)
k
ω=√
m
k
v = A√
m
A=10cm = 0.1m
500
v = 0.1 x√
5
v= 0.1 x10 =1 m/s
(c) Acceleration in SHM
a=– ω2 x
Maximum acceleration, a= ω2 A (at extreme position)
k
ω2 =
m
k
a= A
m
500
a= x 0.1
5
a=10m/s2
The Simple Pendulum

A simple pendulum consists of a particle of mass m ( bob ) suspended

from one end of an unstretchable, massless string of length L fixed at the
other end.
Period of Oscillations of a Simple Pendulum

The radial component, mg cos𝛉 is cancelled by the tension,T.

The tangential component, mg sinθ produces a restoring torque,
τ = –L (mg sinθ ) --------------(1)
(Where the negative sign indicates that the torque acts to reduce θ.)
L= length of simple pendulum.
For rotational motion we have,
τ = I α -----------------(2)
α is angular acceleration.
From eqn (1) and (2)
I α = –L mg sinθ
–mgL
α= sinθ (since θ is very small, sinθ≈θ)
I
–mgL
α= θ ---------------(3)
I

Acceleration of SHM , a=– ω2 x -------------------(4)

Comparing eqns (3) and (4)
mgL
ω2 =
I
I =mL2
mgL
ω2 = mL2
g
ω2 =
L
g
ω=√
L
2π 2π
Period, T= =
ω g
√L

𝐋
T = 𝟐𝛑√𝐠
Example
What is the length of a simple pendulum, which ticks seconds (seconds
pendulum) ?
L
T = 2π√
g
l
T2 = 4π2
g
T2 g
L=
4π2

For seconds pendulum ,T = 2s

22 x 9.8
L= =0.994 ≈ 1m
4 x 3.142
 Chapter 14
Waves
Waves
The patterns, which move without the actual physical transfer or flow of
matter as a whole, are called waves.

The waves we come across are mainly of three types:

(a) Mechanical waves,
(b) Electromagnetic waves and
(c) Matter waves.

Mechanical waves
Mechanical waves are governed by Newton’s laws, and require a material
medium for their propagation., such as water, air, rock, etc.
E.g, water waves, sound waves, seismic waves, etc.

Electromagnetic waves
The electromagnetic waves do not require any medium for their
propagation.
All electromagnetic waves travel through vacuum at the same
speed of light c, 3x 108 m𝑠 −1
E.g, visible light, ultraviolet light, radio waves, microwaves, x-rays etc.

Matter waves
Matter waves are associated with moving electrons, protons, neutrons and
other fundamental particles, and even atoms and molecules. These are the
constituents of matter and hence such wave are called matter waves.
Matter waves associated with electrons are employed in electron
microscopes.
Transverse and Longitudinal Waves
Mechanical waves can be transverse or longitudinal depending on the
relationship between the directions of vibrations of particles in the
medium and that of the propagation of wave.

Transverse waves
In transverse waves, the constituents of the medium oscillate
perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation.
 ▪ They travel in the form of crests and troughs.
▪ Transverse waves can be propagated only in solids and strings, and
not in fluids.
▪ E.g, Waves on a stretched string,

A single pulse is sent along a stretched string. As

each element of the string move perpendicular to
the direction in which the wave travels, the wave
is a transverse wave.

Longitudinal waves
In longitudinal waves the constituents of the medium oscillate along the
direction of wave propagation.

▪ They travel in the form of compressions and rarefactions.

▪ Longitudinal waves can propagate in all elastic
media,i.e,solids,liquids nd gases.
▪ E.g, sound waves, vibrations in a spring.

A sound wave is set up in an air filled pipe by

moving a piston back and forth. As the
oscillations of an element of air are parallel
to the direction in which the wave travels,
the wave is a longitudinal wave.
Capillary waves and Gravity waves
The waves on the surface of water are of two kinds: capillary waves and
gravity waves.
Capillary waves
Capillary waves are ripples of fairly short wavelength, not more than a
few centimetres. The restoring force that produces them is the surface
tension of water.

Gravity waves
Gravity waves have wavelengths typically ranging from several metres to
several hundred metres. The restoring force that produces these waves is
the pull of gravity, which tends to keep the water surface at its lowest
level.

Travelling or Progressive Wave

A wave, transverse or longitudinal, is said to be travelling or progressive if
it travels from one point of the medium to another.

Displacement Relation in a Progressive Wave along a String

(transverse wave)
A progressive wave travelling along the positive direction of the x-axis can
be represented as
y (x, t ) = a sin (kx – ωt + ϕ)
A progressive wave travelling along the negative direction of the x-axis can
be represented as
y (x, t ) = a sin (kx +ωt + ϕ)
Graphical variation of displacement wih time for a progressive wave
(Transverse wave)

Crest
A point of maximum positive displacement in a wave, is called crest.
Trough
A point of maximum negative displacement is called trough.
Amplitude
The amplitude a of a wave is the magnitude of the maximum displacement
of the elements from their equilibrium positions as the wave passes
through them.
Since ‘a’ is a magnitude, it is a positive quantity, even if the displacement is
negative.

Phase
The phase of the wave is the argument (kx – ωt + ϕ) of the oscillatory
term sine . It describes the state of motion as the wave sweeps through a
string element at a particular position x. It changes linearly with time t.
Phase Constant
The constant ϕ is called the initial phase angle. The value of ϕ is
determined by the initial displacement(at, t=0)and velocity of the element
(at, x = 0).
Wavelength and Angular Wave Number
Wavelength
The wavelength λ of a wave is the minimum
distance between two consecutive troughs
or crests or two consecutive points in the
same phase of wave motion.

Propagation Constant or Angular Wave Number

Propagation constant or Angular Wave Number is defined as

𝟐𝝅
k=
𝝀
Its SI unit is radian per metre or rad 𝑚−1

Period, Angular Frequency and Frequency

Period
The period of oscillation T of a wave is defined as the time taken by any
element to complete one oscillation.

Angular Frequency
Angular Frequency of a wave is given by
𝟐𝛑
ω=
𝐓
Its SI unit is rad s−1
𝟐𝛑
From this equation, 𝐓=
𝛚
Frequency
It is the number of oscillations per unit time made by an element as the
wave passes through it.
Frequency is the reciprocal of period.
𝟏
𝝂=
𝑻
𝛚
𝝂=
𝟐𝝅
It is usually measured in hertz.
Example
A wave travelling along a string is described by,
y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x – 3.0 t), in which the numerical constants are in
SI units (0.005 m, 80.0 rad 𝑚−1 , and 3.0 rad 𝑠 −1 ). Calculate
(a) the amplitude,
(b) the wavelength,
(c) the period and frequency of the wave.
(d) Calculate the displacement y of the wave at a distance
x = 30.0 cm and time t = 20 s ?
Answer
y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x – 3.0 t)
The general expression for a travelling wave is
y (x,t ) = a sin (kx – ωt + ϕ)
Comparing these equations
(a) Amplitude , a=0.005m

(b) k=80 rad 𝑚−1

2𝜋
but , k=
𝜆
2𝜋
= 80
𝜆
2𝜋
𝜆 = =0.0785 m
80
𝝀 = 𝟕. 𝟖𝟓 𝒄𝒎
(c) ω=3
2𝜋
=3
𝑇
2𝜋
𝑇= = 𝟐. 𝟎𝟗 𝐬
3
Frequency, 𝜈 = 1/T =1/2.09
𝝂 = 0.48 Hz
(d) y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x – 3.0 t)
x = 30.0 cm =0.3m
t = 20 s
y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x 0.3 – 3.0 x20)
= (0.005 m) sin (–36 )
= (0.005 m) sin (–36 + 12 𝜋)
12 π is added ,so tht (–36 + 12 π) becomes positive
= (0.005 m) sin (1.699)
= (0.005 m) sin (970 ) = 5 mm
The Speed of a Travelling Wave

Consider a wave propagating in positive x direction with initial phaseϕ =0

y (x, t ) = a sin (kx – ωt )
As the wave moves, each point of the waveform (say A) retains its
displacement y. This is possible only when the argument (kx – ωt ) is
constant.
(kx – ωt ) =constant
𝑑
(kx – ωt ) = 0
𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑡
k −ω =0
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑥 ω
=
𝑑𝑡 𝑘
𝛚
v=
𝒌
2𝜋
ω = 2𝜋𝜈 , k=
𝜆
2𝜋𝜈
v= 2𝜋
𝜆

v=𝝂𝝀
This is a general relation valid for all progressive waves.
The speed of a wave is related to its wavelength and frequency , but it is
determined by the properties of the medium.
Speed of a Transverse Wave on Stretched String
The speed of transverse waves on a string is determined by two factors,
(i) the linear mass density or mass per unit length, μ, and
(ii) the tension T
𝑻
v=√𝛍
The speed of a wave along a stretched ideal string does not depend on the
frequency of the wave.
Example
A steel wire 0.72 m long has a mass of 5.0 ×10−3 kg. If the wire is under a
tension of 60 N, what is the speed of transverse waves on the wire ?
𝑇
v=√μ
𝑀
μ=
𝑙
5.0 ×10−3
=
0.72
= 6.9 ×10−3 kg 𝑚−1
T = 60 N
60
v=√ = 93 m 𝑠 −1
6.9 ×10−3
Speed of a Longitudinal Wave( Speed of Sound)
The longitudinal waves in a medium travel in the form of compressions
and rarefactions or changes in density, ρ.
▪ The speed of propagation of a longitudinal wave in a fluid
𝑩
v=√ 𝛒
B= the bulk modulus of medium
ρ = the density of the medium
▪ The speed of a longitudinal wave in a solid bar
𝒀
v=√𝛒
Y =Young’s modulus
ρ=density of the medium,
▪ The speed of a longitudinal wave in an ideal gas
Case1 -Newtons Formula
Newton assumed that, the pressure variations in a medium
during propagation of sound are isothermal.
𝑩
v=√ 𝛒
For isothermal process
PV = constant
VΔP + PΔV = 0
VΔP =−PΔV
VΔP
− =P
ΔV
B =P
 𝑷
v=√ρ
This relation was first given by Newton and is known as
Newton’s formula.

Case 2- Laplace correction to Newton’s formula.

Laplace that the pressure variations in the propagation of sound
waves are so fast that there is little time for the heat flow to
maintain constant temperature. These variations, therefore,
are adiabatic and not isothermal.
𝑩
v=√
𝛒
For adiabatic processes
P𝑉 𝛾 = constant
Δ P𝑉 𝛾 =0
P𝛾𝑉 𝛾−1 ΔV + 𝑉 𝛾 Δ P =0
𝛾P 𝑉 𝛾−1 ΔV = −𝑉 𝛾 Δ P
𝑉 𝛾 ΔP
𝛾 P =−
𝑉 𝛾−1 ΔV
ΔP
𝛾 P =−
𝑉 −1 ΔV
VΔP
𝛾 P =− =B
ΔV
B=𝛾P
𝜸𝐏
v=√ 𝛒
This modification of Newton’s formula is referred to as the
Laplace correction.
𝐶𝑃 7
γ= , For air γ = .
𝐶𝑉 5
The speed of sound in air at STP = 331.3 m 𝒔−𝟏
The Principle of Superposition of Waves
When two or more waves overlap, the resultant displacement is the
algebraic sum of the displacements due to each wave.
let 𝑦1 (x, t) and 𝑦2 (x, t) be the displacements individual waves, then
resultant displacement y (x, t) is,
y (x, t) = 𝒚𝟏 (x, t) + 𝒚𝟐 (x, t)
Consider two wave travelling in positive x direction having same
amplitude, same angular frequency and wavenumber and therefor same
wavelength and speed. The waves differ only in their initial phase ϕ
𝑦1 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt)
𝑦2 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt + ϕ )
Now, applying the superposition principle, the resultant displacement is
y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt) + a sin (kx – ωt + ϕ)
A+B A−B
sinA + sinB = 2 sin ( )cos( )
2 2

Applying this relation the resultant displacement is,

𝛟 𝛟
y (x, t) = [2a cos ] sin (kx – ωt + ) ----------(1)
𝟐 𝟐
The resultant wave is also a sinusoidal wave, travelling in the positive
direction of x-axis.
𝛟
Initial phase of resultant wave =
𝟐
Amplitude of resultant wave is
𝛟
A = 2a cos 𝟐 ------------(2)
If 𝛟 = 0, i.e. ,the two waves are in phase,

Resultant displacement, y(x,t) = 2a sin (kx – ωt)

Amplitude , A = 2a
which is the largest possible value of Amplitude A.
If ϕ = π, i.e. the two waves are in phase,

y (x, t) = 0
A=0
Reflection of Wave
The reflection at a rigid boundary

▪ The reflected wave will have a phase reversal i.e, a phase difference
of π radian or 1800 .
▪ There will be no displacement at the boundary as the string is fixed
there.
Incident wave, 𝒚𝒊 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt)
Reflected wave, 𝑦𝑟 (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt + π)
sin(180+θ)=-sin θ
𝒚𝒓 (x, t) = – a sin (kx + ωt)

The Reflection at an Open Boundary

▪ The reflected wave will have same sign (no phase reversal) and
amplitude as the incident wave.
▪ There will be maximum displacement at the boundary( twice the
amplitude of either of the pulses)
Incident wave, 𝒚𝒊 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt)
Reflected wave, 𝒚𝒓 (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt).
Standing Waves and Normal Modes
Standing Waves
The interference of two identical waves moving in opposite directions
produces standing waves.

Wave travelling in the positive direction of x-axis

𝑦1 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt)
Wave travelling in the negative direction of x-axis
𝑦2 (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt)
By the principle of superposition
y (x, t) = 𝑦1 (x, t) + 𝑦2 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt) + a sin (kx + ωt)
y (x, t) = (2a sin kx) cos ωt
This equation represents a standing wave, a wave in which the waveform
does not move.
Amplitude of wave , A= 2a sin kx.

Nodes and Antinodes

The positions of zero amplitude in a staning wave are called nodes and the
positions of maximum amplitude are called antinodes.

Condition for Nodes

At nodes,the amplitude of standing wave is zero
2a sin kx =0
sin kx =0
kx = nπ, for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..
2π
But k =
λ
2π
x = nπ
λ
𝛌
x=𝒏𝟐 , for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..
𝟏𝛌 𝟐𝛌 𝟑𝛌
i.e., nodes are formed at locations x=𝟎, , , ,… ……
𝟐 𝟐 𝟐

The nodes are separated by λ/2 and are located half way between pairs of
antinodes.
Condition for Antinodes
At antinodes, the amplitude of standing wave is maximum.
2a sin kx =maximum
sin kx =±1
1
kx = (n + ) π, for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..
2
2π
but ,k =
λ
2π 1
x = (n + ) π
λ 2
𝟏 𝛌
x = (n +𝟐 ) , for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..
𝟐
𝛌 𝟑𝛌 𝟓𝛌
i.e., antinodes are formed at locations x= , , ,………
𝟒 𝟒 𝟒

The antinodes are separated by λ/2 and are located half way between
pairs of nodes.
(1)Standing waves in a Stretched String fixed at both the ends
For a stretched string of length L, fixed at both ends, the two ends
x= 0 and x= L of the string have to be nodes.
The condition for node at L
𝛌
L = 𝒏 𝟐 , for n = 1, 2, 3, ...
Fundamental mode or the first harmonic
The oscillation mode with n=1 , the lowest frequency is called the
fundamental mode or the first harmonic.

𝝀𝟏
L=
2
𝝀𝟏 = 2L
But v=𝜈λ ,
v
𝜈 =
𝝀
v
Frequency, 𝜈1 = 𝝀
𝟏

𝐯
𝝂𝟏 = ----------(1)
𝟐𝐋
The second harmonic
The second harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2.

𝝀𝟐
L=2 =𝝀𝟐
2

𝝀𝟐 = L
Frequency, 𝜈2 = 𝝀v
𝟐

𝜈2 = Lv
𝐯
𝝂𝟐 = 𝟐 𝟐𝐋 -------------(2)
𝝂𝟐 = 𝟐𝝂𝟏
The Third Harmonic
The third harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 3.

𝝀𝟑
L=3
2
2𝐿
𝝀𝟑 =
3
v
Frequency, 𝜈3 = 𝝀
𝟑
v
𝜈3 = 2𝐿
3
𝐯
𝝂𝟑 = 𝟑 𝟐𝐋 --------------(3)
𝝂𝟑 = 𝟑𝒗𝟏
and so on.
𝝂𝟏 : 𝝂𝟐 : 𝝂𝟑 = 𝟏: 𝟐: 𝟑
Thus all harmonics are possible in a stretched string fixed at both the ends.
(2) The modes of vibration in a closed pipe (system closed at
one end and the other end open).
Eg: Resonance Column(Air columns such as glass tubes partially filled
with water) .
If the length of the air column is L, then closed end x=0 is a node and the
open end, x = L, is an antinode.
The condition for antinode at L
𝟏 𝛌
L=(n + ) for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, …
𝟐 𝟐

Fundamental mode or the first harmonic

The oscillation mode with n=0 , fundamental mode or the first harmonic.

𝝀𝟏
L=
4

𝝀𝟏 = 4L
Frequency, 𝜈1 = 𝝀v
𝟏
𝐯
𝝂𝟏 = 𝟒𝐋 ------------(1)

The Third Harmonic

The Third harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 1.

𝝀𝟑
L=3
4
4𝑳
𝝀𝟑 =
3

Frequency, 𝜈3 = 𝝀v
𝟑
v
𝜈3 = 4𝑳
3
𝐯
𝝂𝟑 = 𝟑 𝟒𝐋 --------------(2)
𝝂𝟑 = 𝟑 𝝂𝟏
The Fifth Harmonic
The Fifth harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2.
𝝀𝟒
L=5
4
4𝑳
𝝀𝟒 =
5

Frequency, 𝜈5 = 𝝀v
𝟓
v
𝜈5 = 4𝑳
5
𝐯
𝝂𝟓 = 𝟓 𝟒𝐋
𝝂𝟓 = 𝟓𝝂 𝟏
And so on.
𝝂𝟏 : 𝝂𝟑 : 𝝂𝟓 = 𝟏: 𝟑: 𝟓
Thus only odd harmonics are possible in a closed pipe.

(3) The modes of vibration in a an open pipe (system open

at both ends). Eg: Flute
For an open pipe of length L, antinodes are formed at both ends.
λ
L = 𝑛 , for n = 1, 2, 3, ...
2
Fundamental Mode or The First Harmonic
The oscillation mode with n=1 , the lowest frequency is called the
fundamental mode or the first harmonic.

𝝀𝟏
L=
2

𝝀𝟏 = 2L
Frequency, 𝜈1 = 𝝀v
𝟏
𝐯
𝝂𝟏 = 𝟐𝐋 ------------(1)
The Second Harmonic
The second harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2.

𝝀𝟐
L=2
2

𝝀𝟐 = L
Frequency, 𝜈2 = 𝝀v
𝟐

𝜈2 = Lv
𝐯
𝝂𝟐 = 𝟐 𝟐𝐋 ------------(2)
𝝂𝟐 = 𝟐𝝂𝟏
The Third Harmonic
The third harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 3.

𝝀𝟑
L=3
2
2𝐿
𝝀𝟑 =
3
v
Frequency, 𝜈3 = 𝝀
𝟑
v
𝜈3 = 2𝐿
3
𝐯
𝝂𝟑 = 𝟑 𝟐𝐋 ------------(3)
𝝂𝟑 = 𝟑𝝂𝟏
and so on.
𝝂𝟏 : 𝝂𝟐 : 𝝂𝟑 = 𝟏: 𝟐: 𝟑
Thus all harmonics are possible in an open pipe.
So open pipes are preferred over closed pipes in musical instruments.
Beats
The periodic variations(wavering) of sound intensity when two waves of
nearly same frequencies and amplitudes travelling in the same direction,
are superimposed on each other is called beats.
These wavering of sound is also called waxing and waning.
If 𝑣1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑣2 are the frequencies of superposing waves, the beat frequency
𝝂𝒃𝒆𝒂𝒕 = 𝝂𝟏 − 𝝂𝟐
 Chapter 1
Units and Measurement
1.Name the fundamental(base) quantities and units according to SI
system.

2.Define angle

3.Define solid angle

4.Write the dimensional formulae of following derived quantities.

Area -L2 Work or energy - ML2 T −2
Volume -L3 Power - ML2 T −3
Density -ML−3 Pressure - ML−1 T −2
Velocity- LT −1 Stress - ML−1 T −2
Acceleration - LT −2 Modulus of elasticity- ML−1 T −2
Momentum - MLT −1
Force - MLT −2
5.Write two physical quantities having no unit and dimension
Relative density, strain

6.Write two physical quantities that have unit but no dimension

Plane angle, solid angle, angular displacement
7.

8.

9.Name and state the principle used to check the correctness of an

equation.
Principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
For an equation to be correct the dimensions of each terms on both
sides of the equation must be the same Or
The magnitudes of physical quantities may be added or subtracted only
if they have the same dimensions.
10. Write the uses of dimensional analysis
3. Checking the dimensional consistency (correctness) of equatons.
4. Deducing relation among the physical quantities.
11. Using the method of dimension check whether the equation is
dimensionally correct or not

Since the dimensions of all terms are not same the equation is not correct
12. Using the method of dimension check whether the equation is
dimensionally correct or not

Since the dimensions of all terms on both sides are same the equation is
dimensionally correct correct
13. Using the method of dimension check whether the equation is
dimensionally correct or not

14.Check the dimensional correctness of the equation E=m𝐜 𝟐

15.In the given equation v = x + at , find the dimensions of x.

(where v= velocity , a=acceleration , t=time)

16. In the given equatio x= a + bt + c𝐭 𝟐 , find the dimensions of a,b and c.

(where x is in meters and t in seconds)
17.The Van der waals equation of 'n' moles of a real gas is
𝒂
(P+ 𝟐 )(V−b)=nRT. Where P is the pressure, V is the volume, T is absolute
𝑽
temperature, R is molar gas constant and a, b, c are Van der
waal constants. Find the dimensional formula for a and b.
𝐚
(P+ 𝟐)(V−b)=nRT.
𝐕
By principle of homegeneity, the quantities with same dimensions can be
added or subtracted.
a
[P] =[ 2 ]
V
[a] =[PV 2 ]
=ML−1 T −2 x L6
[a] = ML5 T −2
[b] = [V]
[b] =L3
18.Derive the equation for kinetic energy E of a body of mass m moving
with velocity v

19.derive the expression for period of oscillations of a simple pendulum

using the method of dimensions

𝑙
T=k√
𝑔
20.Write any two limitations of dimensional analysis.

21.What do you mean by significant figures?

The reliable digits plus the first uncertain digit in a measurement are
known as significant digits or significant figures.

22.Find the number of significant figures in following numbers

0.02380 - 4
23.08 - 4
23.80 - 4
2380 -3
43.00 - 4
4300 -2
2
4.700 × 10 -4
−3
4.700 × 10 -4
23.If mass of an object is measured to be, 4.237 g (four significant figures)
and its volume is measured to be 2.51cm3(3 significant figures), then find
its density in appropriate significant figures.
𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑠 4.237 𝑔
Density = = = 1.688047
𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 2.51𝑐𝑚3
As per rule the final result should be rounded to 3 significant figures .
So the answer is 1.69 g/ 𝑐𝑚3
24.Find the sum of the numbers 436.32 g, 227.2 g and 0.301 g to
appropriate significant figures.
436.32 g + (2 decimal places)
227.2 g + (1 decimal place)
0.301 g (3 decimal places)
_______________
663.821 g
As per rule ,the final result should be rounded to 1 decimal place.
So the answer 663.8 g
 Chapter 2
Motion in a Straight Line

1.Define instantaneous velocity?

The velocity at an instant is called instantaneous velocity.
Δx
v = lim
Δt→0 Δt
𝐝𝐱
v=
𝐝𝐭

2.When does the average velocity become equal to instantaneous velocity?

When the time interval Δt → 0 ,the average velocity becomes equal to
instantaneous velocity.
Δx dx
v = lim =
Δt→0 Δt dt

3.The speedometer of a vehicle shows …………………..

Instantaneous speed.
4. The area under velocity -time graph gives ----- ---
Displacement

5. The slope of velocity-time graph gives ----------- --

Acceleration

6. Define average accelaration

The average acceleration over a time interval is defined as the ratio of
change in velocity to the time interval.
𝐯𝟐 −𝐯𝟏 𝚫𝐯
𝐚⃗ = =
𝐭 𝟐 −𝐭 𝟏 𝚫𝐭

7.Define instantaneous acceleration.

The acceleration of a particle at any instant of its motion is called
instantaneous acceleration.
𝚫𝐯 𝐝𝐯
a = 𝐥𝐢𝐦 =
𝚫𝐭→𝟎 𝚫𝐭 𝐝𝐭
𝐝𝐯
a=
𝐝𝐭
8.Draw the position- time graph of an object moving with

9. Draw the velocity- time graph of an object moving with

(a) uniform positive acceleration (b) uniform negative acceleration

10.Draw the velocity- time graph of a stone thown vertiaccly upwrds and
comes back.

11.Draw the speed- time graph of a stone thown vertiaccly upwrds and
comes back.
12. Draw the velocity-time graph of a freely falling body.( A stone
vertically falling downwards)

13. Is it possible for a body to have zero velocity with a nonzero

acceleration. Give an example.
Yes. When a body is thrown upwards ,at the highest point of projection,
its velocity is zero , but it has an acceleration.
14.The velocity -time graph of a ball thrown vertically upward with an
initial velocity is shown in figure.

a)What is themagnitude of initial velocity of ball?

b)Calculate the distance travelled by the ball during 20seconds from the
grah.
c) Calculate the acceleration of the ball from the graph
a)Initial velocity=100m/s
b)Distance travelled = area of graph
1 1
= b1h1 + b2h2
2 2
1 1
= x10 x 100 + x 10 x100
2 2
=1000m
c) Acceleration = slope
v −v 0−100
= 2 1= =-10 m/s2
t2 −t1 10−0
19. (a)Draw the velocity-time graph of a body with uniform aceeleration .
(b) Using the graph obtain (i) Velocity - time relation
(ii) Displacement -tme relation
(iii) Displacement velocity relation
Consider a body moving with uniform acceleration . The velocity – time
graph is as shown in figure

(1) Velocity – time relation

From the graph , acceleration = slope
BC
a=
AC
v−u
a=
t
v-u = at
v = u +at -------------------- (1)
or (v = v0 +at)
(2) Position-time relation
Displacement = Area under the graph
s = Area of + Area of
s = ut + ½ (v-u) t
But from equation (1)
v -u = at
s = ut + ½ at x t
s = ut + ½ at2 ------------------(2)
or (s=v0 t +½ at2)
(3)Position – velocity relation
Displacement = Average velocity x time
v+u v−u
s=( )( )
2 a
v2 −u2
s=( )
2a
v 2 − u2 = 2as
𝐯 𝟐 = 𝐮𝟐 + 2as ----------------(3)
Or (𝐯 𝟐 = 𝐯𝟎 𝟐 + 2as )
20.What do you mean by stopping distance of vehicles ? Obtain its
expression.
When brakes are applied to a moving vehicle, the distance it travels before
stopping is called stopping distance.
𝑣 2 = 𝑢2 + 2as
0 = 𝑢2 + 2as
−𝑢2 = 2as
−𝒖𝟐
s= 𝟐𝒂
21. An object is under freefall. Draw its (a) Acceleration -time graph
(b) Velocity- time graph
(c) Displacement-time graph
22.Velocity – time graph of a body is given below

a) Which portion of the graph represents uniform retardation?

(i) OA (ii)AB (iii) BC (iv) OC
b) Find the displacement in time 2s to 7s.
c) A stone is dropped from a height h. Arrive at an expression for the
time taken to reach the ground.

a)BC
b)

Displacement = area of rectangle

= 6 x 5 = 30m

c) s = ut +½ at2
-h= 0 - ½ gt2
2h
t2 =
g

2h
t =√
g

23.A ball is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity of 20 m s–1 from the
top of a multistorey building. The height of the point from where the ball is
thrown is 25.0 m from the ground.
(a) How high will the ball rise ? and
(b) how long will it be before the ball hits the ground? Take g = 10 m s–2
 Chapter 3
Motion in a Plane

1. Differentiate scalar and vector quantities

A scalar quantity has only magnitude and no direction.
Eg. distance , speed, mass , temperature, time ,work ,power, energy,
pressure, frequency, angular frequency etc.

A vector quantity has both magnitude and direction and obeys the
triangle law
of addition or the parallelogram law of addition.
Eg. displacement, velocity, acceleration , momentum, force,
angular velocity, torque, angular momentum etc.
2.When two vectors are said to be equal?
Two vectors A and B are said to be equal if, and only if, they have the
same magnitude and the same direction.

3.What do you mean by null vectors or zero vector?

A Null vector or Zero vector is a vector having zero magnitude and is
represented by O or Ō . The result of adding two equal and opposite
vectors will be a Zero vector
Eg: When a body returns to its initial position its displacement will be a
zero vector.
4.What are unit vectors?
A unit vector is a vector of unit magnitude and points in a particular
direction.
It has no dimension and unit. It is used to specify a direction only.
̅
̂= 𝐀
𝐀 |𝐀|
5.The position vector of a particle P located in an x-y plane is shown in
figure.

a)Redraw the figure by showing the rectangular components.

b)Write the position vector in terms of rectangular components.
 a)

b) 𝑟̅ = 𝑟 cos 𝜃𝑖̂ + 𝑟 sin 𝜃𝑗̂

6.State triangle law of vector addition.
If two vectors are represented in magnitude and direction by the two sides
of a triangle taken in order ,then their resultant is given by the third side of
the triangle taken in reverse order.

7.State parallelogram law of vector addition

If two vectors are represented in magnitude and direction by the
adjacent sides of a parallelogram ,then their resultant is given by the
diagonal of the parallelogram.

8.Two vectors A and B are given below.

Redraw the figure and show the vector sum

using parallelogram method.

9.Write the equation to find the magnitude of resultant of two vectors A

and B
R = √A2 + B2 + 2ABcosθ
10.Derive the expression for magnitude of resultant of two vectors by
analytical method. Write the expression for direction of resultant vector.

SNP , cos θ = PN / PS sin θ = SN /PS

cos θ = PN / B sin θ = SN / B
PN = B cos θ SN = B sin θ
From the geometry of the figure,
OS 2 = ON 2 + SN 2
OS 2 = (OP + PN) 2 + SN 2
OS 2 = (A + B cos θ ) 2 + (B sin θ ) 2
R 2 = A 2 +2AB cos θ + B 2 cos 2θ +B 2sin2 θ
R 2 = A 2 + B 2 + 2AB cos θ
𝐑 = √𝐀𝟐 + 𝐁 𝟐 + 𝟐𝐀𝐁𝐜𝐨𝐬𝛉

𝑺𝑵
Direction , tan𝜶 =
𝑶𝑵
𝐁 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉
tan𝛂 =
𝐀+𝐁 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝛉

11.What is the trajectory(path) followed by a projectile?

Parabola
12. Draw the trajectory of a projectile

13.A stone is thrown up with a velocity u , which makes an angle 𝛉 with

the horizontal.
a)What are the magnitudes of horizontal and vertical components of
velocity?
b)How do these components vary with time?
a) Horizontal component - u cos θ and
vertical component - u sin θ
b) Horizontal component- u cos θ remains constant with time.
vertical component first deceases, becomes zero at the highest
point of projection and then increases in reverse direction.

14.What are the values of these components at the highest point of

projection?
At the highest point,Horizontal component= u cos θ
Vertical component = zero
15. A projectile has an acceleration of ……… in vertical direction and………
acceleration in horizontal direction
-9.8m 𝑠 −2 , zero
(vertical component , ay = -g = -9.8m/𝑠 2 and
Horizontal component ax = 0)
16. Show that the path of the projectile is a parabola .
Displacement of the projectile after a time t
x= ucosθ t
x
t=
ucosθ
1
y= u sinθ t − g t 2
2
x 1 x 2
y= u sinθ ( ) − 2 g (ucosθ)
ucosθ
g
y= tanθ x − x2
2 u2 cos2 θ

17. Derive the equation for Time of flight, Horizontal range and Maximum
height of a projectile.

Time of Flight of a projectile (T)

Consider the motion in vertical direction,
s = ut +½ at2
s=0, u = u sin θ , a =-g , t = T
0 = u sin θ T - ½ gT2
½ gT2 =u sin θ T
𝟐 𝐮 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉
T= 𝐠

Horizontal range of a projectile (R)

Horizontal range = Horizontal component of velocity x Time of flight
2 u sin θ
R = u cos θ x
g
u2 x 2 sinθ cos θ
R=
g
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝟐𝛉
R= 𝐠
Maximum height of a projectile (H)
Consider the motion in vertical direction to the highest point
v2 – u2 = 2as
u = u sin θ, v = 0 , a = -g , s = H
0 - u2 sin 2θ = -2 g H
𝐮𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧𝟐 𝛉
H= 𝟐𝐠
18.What is the angle of projection for maximum horizontal range
𝟒𝟓𝟎
19. What is the maximum value of horizontal range
Range is maximum when θ=450
u2 sin 90
R=
g
u2
Rmax =
g
20. Find the angle of projection for which the range will be same as that in
case of θ=𝟑𝟎𝟎 for a given velocity of projection.
For a given velocity of projection range will be same
for angles 𝜽 and ( 90-𝜽 )
Here θ=300
90-𝜽 =90-30 =600
The range will be same for 300 and 600 ,for a given velocity of projection.
21.A cricket ball is thrown at a speed of 28 m s –1 in a direction 30° above
the horizontal. Calculate (a) the maximum height, (b) the time taken by
the ball to return to the same level, and (c) the distance from the thrower
to the point where the ball returns to the same level.
(a) H = u2 sin 2θ
2g
H = 282 sin2 30
2 x 9.8
H = 10 m
(b) T = 2 u sin θ
g
T = 2x 28 sin30
9.8
T = 2.9 s
(c) R = u2 sin 2θ
g
R = 282 sin60
9.8
R = 69 m

22.What do you mean by uniform circular motion?

When an object follows a circular path at a constant speed, the motion of
the object is called uniform circular motion.
Note:-
▪ The speed is constant in uniform circular motion.
▪ The velocity is not constant in uniform circular motion.
▪ The acceleration is not constant in uniform circular motion.

23.Give an example for a motion in which speed is constant, but velocity

varying.
Uniform circular motion

24.Give an example for a motion in which speed is constant, still

accelerating.
Uniform circular motion

25.What is period in uniform circular motion

The time taken by an object to make one revolution is known as its time
period T. Unit-second

26.What is Frequency in uniform circular motion

The number of revolutions made in one second is called its frequency.
1
υ=
𝑇
unit - hertz (Hz)

27.Define Angular velocity

Angular velocity is the time rate of change of angular displacement
Δθ dθ 2π
ω= or ω = or ω = or ω = 2π υ
Δ𝑡 d𝑡 𝑇

Unit is rad/s
28.Write the relation connecting angular velocity and linear velocity
v=rω
29.Derive the relation connecting angular velocity and linear velocity

arc
angle =
radius
Δr
Δθ=
r
Δr=r Δθ
Δr Δθ
=r
Δ𝑡 Δ𝑡
v=rω

30.Define angular acceleration

The rate of change of angular velocity is called angular acceleration.
dω
α =
dt
dθ
ω=
d𝑡
d dθ
α= ( )
dt 𝑑𝑡

𝑑2𝜃
α=
𝑑𝑡 2

31.Define Centripetal acceleration

A body in uniform circular motion experiences an acceleration , which is
directed towards the centre along its radius .This is s called centripetal
acceleration .
32.Derive the expression for centripetal acceleration.
 Δv Δr
=
v r
vΔr
Δv=
r
Δv vΔr
=
Δt r Δt
v
a= xr
r
𝐯𝟐
a=
𝐫
33.An insect trapped in a circular groove of radius 12 cm moves along the
groove steadily and completes 7 revolutions in 100 s.
(a) What is the angular speed, and the linear speed of the motion?
(b) Is the acceleration vector a constant vector ? What is its magnitude ?
100
Period, T= s
7
(a) The angular speed ω is given by
2π 2π 2π x7
ω= = 100 = =0.44 rad/s
𝑇 100
7
The linear speed v is :
v =ω R = 0.44 × 0.12 = 5.3 x 10 -2 m s -1

(b) The direction of velocity v is along the tangent to the circle at every
point. The acceleration is directed towards the centre of the circle. Since
this direction changes continuously, acceleration here is not a constant
vector.
a = ω 2 R = (0.44 ) 2 x0.12 = 2.3x10 -2 m s -2
 Chapter 4
Laws of Motion
1.State Galileo’s Law Inertia
If the net external force is zero, a body at rest continues to remain at rest
and a body in motion continues to move with a uniform velocity.

2.What do you mean by inertia of a body?

If the net external force is zero, a body at rest continues to remain at rest
and a body in motion continues to move with a uniform velocity.
This property of the body is called inertia.

3. The word inertia means …………………… . resistance to change.

4. What are different types of inertia?
• Inertia of rest-The tendency of a body to remain in the state of rest.
Eg-A person is standing in a stationary gets thrown backward when
the bus starts suddenly.
• Inertia of motion - The tendency of a body to remain in the state of
uniform motion.
Eg-The a person standing in a moving bus gets thrown forward when
the bus suddenly stops .
• Inertia of direction - The tendency of a body to remain in a particular
direction.
Eg- When a shopping cart makes a sudden turning, the things in it
tumble down.
5.State Newton’s first law of motion (Law of inertia)
Every body continues to be in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a
straight line unless compelled by some external force to change that state.

6.Newton’s first law of motion describes ………………. Inertia

7.Define momentum
Momentum, P of a body is defined to be the product of its mass m and
velocity v, and is denoted by p.
p=mv
8.State Newton’s Second Law f Motion. Write its mathematical expression.

∆p
F∝
∆t
∆p dp
F= or F=
∆t dt
9.Why a seasoned cricketer draws his hands backwards during a catch?
By Newton's second law of motion ,
∆p
F=
∆t
When he draws his hands backwards, the time interval (∆t) to stop the
ball increases .Then force decreases and it does not hurt his hands.

10. Derive of Equation of force from Newton's second law of motion

By Newton's second law of motion ,

11.Define newton

12. A bullet of mass 0.04 kg moving with a speed of 90 m/s enters a heavy
wooden block and is stopped after a distance of 60 cm. What is the average
resistive force exerted by the block on the bullet?

The negative sign shows that the force is retarding.

13.Show that Newton’s second Law is consistent with the first law. ( or
starting from Newton’s second Law arrive at Newton’s first law)

Zero acceleration implies the state of rest or uniform linear motion . i.e,
when there is no external force , the body will remain in its state of rest or
of uniform motion in a straight line. This is Newtons first law of motion.
14.Define Impulse
Impulse is the the product of force and time duration, which is the change
in momentum of the body.
Impulse = Force × time duration
I=Fxt
Unit = kg m s −1
15. Define Impulsive force.
A large force acting for a short time to produce a finite change in
momentum is called an impulsive force.
Eg: A cricket ball hitting a bat
16. Using Newtons second law of motion arrive at Impulse momentum
Principle
Impulse is equal to the change in momentum of the body.
By Newton's second law of motion,
dp
F=
dt
F x dt = dp
I = dp
Impulse = change in momentum
17.A batsman hits back a ball straight in the direction of the bowler
without changing its initial speed of 12 m 𝐬−𝟏 . If the mass of the ball is 0.15
kg, determine the impulse imparted to the ball.
Impulse = change of momentum
Change in momentum = final momentum – initial momentum
Change in momentum = 0.15 × 12–(0.15×-12)
Impulse = 3.6 N s
18.Eventhough action and reaction are equal and opposite they do not
cancel each other .Why?
Action and reaction forces act on different bodies, not on the same body.
So they do not cancel each other , eventhough they are equal and opposite.
19.A man of mass70 kg stands on a weighing scale in a lift whichis moving,
(a) upwards with a uniform speed of 10 m 𝐬 −𝟏
(b) downwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 m 𝐬−𝟐
(c) upwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 m 𝐬−𝟐
What would be the readings on the scale in each case?
(d) What would be the reading if the lift mechanism failed and it falls
down freely under gravity? Take g=10 m 𝐬 −𝟐
(a)When lift moves with uniform speed , a=0
R= mg = 70 x 10=700 N
Reading= 700/ 10= 70 kg
(b)Acceleration a = 5m s-2 downwards
R= m(g-a) =70 ( 10-5)= 70x5= 350N
Reading = 350/ 10 = 35 kg
(c) Acceleration a = 5m s-2 upwards
R= m(g+a) = 70(10+5) = 70x 15= 1050N
Reading = 1050/ 10 = 105 kg
(d) when lift falls freely a=g
R= m(g-g) = 0
Reading = 0
20.State the Law of Conservation of Momentum
The total momentum of an isolated system of interacting particles is
conserved. Or
When there is no external force acting on a system of particles ,their total
momentum remains constant.
21.Prove law of conservation of momentum Using Newton’s second law of
motion
dp
By Newton's second law of motion , F=
dt
When F = 0
dp
=0
dt
dp = 0 ,
p=constant
Thus when there is no external force acting on a system of particles, their
total momentum remains constant.
22. Prove law of conservation of momentum Using Newton’s third law of
motion

Total Final momentum = Total initial momentum

i.e. , the total final momentum of the isolated system equals its total initial
momentum.
23.Explain the recoil of gun using law of conservation of linear momentum
By the law of conservation of momentum,as the system is isolated, the
momentum remains constant

If pb and pg are the momenta of the bullet and gun after firing
pb + pg = 0
pb = - pg
The negative sign shows that gun recoils to conserve momentum.
24.Obtain the expression for Recoil velocity and muzzle velocity
Momentum of bullet after firing , pb = mv
Recoil momentum of the gun after firing , pg = MV
pb = - pg
mv = −MV
−mv
Recoil velocity of gun , V=
M
−MV
Muzzle velocity of bullet , v=
m
M= mass of gun, V= recoil velocity of bullet
m= mass of bullet, v=muzzle velocity of bullet
25.A shell of mass 0.020kg is fired by a gun of mass 100kg. If the muzzle
speed of the shell is 80 m/s, what is the recoil speed of the gun?
𝑚𝑣 0.020 𝑥 80
V= = =0.016m/s
𝑀 100
26.Write the condition for equilibrium when two forces F1 and F2 act on a
particle

27.Write the condition for equilibrium when three forces F1 , F2 and F3 act
on a particle.

28. The maximun value of limiting friction is called ……………….

Limiting friction or Limiting static friction.
29.State the law of static friction
The law of static friction may thus be written as , fs ≤ μs N
where μs the coefficient of static friction,
30.State the Law of Kinetic Friction
fk = μk N
where μk the coefficient of kinetic friction,
31.Write the characteristics of static friction
▪ The maximum value of static friction is ( fs )max
▪ The limiting value of static friction ( fs )max , is independent of the
area of contact.
▪ The limiting value of static friction ( fs )max , varies with the normal
force(N)
( fs )max αN
( 𝐟𝐬 )𝐦𝐚𝐱 = 𝛍𝐬 𝐍
32.Write the characteristics of kinetic friction
▪ Kinetic friction is independent of the area of contact.
▪ Kinetic friction is independent of the velocity of sliding.
▪ Kinetic friction , fk varies with the normal force(N)
fk αN
fk = μk N
33.Show that 𝛍𝐬 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝛉 (the coefficient of static friction is equal to the
tangent of angle of friction) when a body just begins to slide on an
inclined surface

The forces acting on a block of mass m When it just begins to slide are
(i) the weight, mg
(ii) the normal force, N
(iii) the maximum static frictional force ( fs )max
In equilibrium, the resultant of these forces must be zero.
m g sin θ = ( fs )max
But ( fs )max = μs N
mg sin θ= μs N------------(1)
mg cos θ = N-------------(2)

(1) mg sin θ μs N
Eqn(2) -------- =
m g cos θ N
μs = tan θ
34.Disadvantages of friction
In a machine with different moving parts, friction opposes relative motion
and thereby dissipates power in the form of heat, etc. Friction produces
wear and tear.
35.Advantages of friction(Friction is a necessary evil)
Kinetic friction is made use of by brakes in machines and automobiles.
We are able to walk because of static friction.
The friction between the tyres and the road provides the necessary
external force to accelerate the car.
36.Methods to reduce friction
(1)Lubricants are a way of reducing kinetic friction in a machine.
(2)Another way is to use ball bearings between two moving parts of a
machine.
(3) A thin cushion of air maintained between solid surfaces in relative
motion is another effective way of reducing friction.
37.A car moving on a curved level road. What are the various forces acting
on the car?
(iv) The weight of the car, mg
(v) Normal reaction, N
(vi) Frictional force, fs

38.Derive the expression for maximum safe speed on a curved level road

N= mg
The static friction provides the centripetal acceleration
mv2
fs =
R
But , fs ≤ μs N
mv2
≤ μs mg (N=mg)
R
2
v ≤ μs Rg
𝐯𝐦𝐚𝐱 = √𝛍𝐬 𝐑𝐠
39. a) What do you mean by banking of curved roads?
b) Obtain the expression for maximum permissible speed of a vehicle
on a banked road.
c)Write the expression for optimum speed (without considering
frictional force)
a)Raising the outer edge of a curved road above the inner edge is
called banking of curved roads.
b)
 N cos θ = mg +f sin θ
N cos θ - f sin θ =mg --------------(1)

The centripetal force is provided by the horizontal components of N andfs .

mv2
N sin θ + f cos θ = -------------(2)
R
Eqn(1) N cos θ − f sin θ mg
----- = mv2
Eqn(2) N sin θ + f cos θ
R
Dividing throughout by N cos θ
f
1 −N tan θ Rg
f =
tan θ + N v2

1 −μs tan θ Rg
=
tan θ + μs v2
Rg(μs +tan θ )
v2 =
1 −μs tan θ

Rg(μs +tan θ )
vmax = √
1 −μs tan θ

c)If friction is absent, μs = 0

Then Optimum speed, voptimum = √Rg tan θ

40.A circular racetrack of ra dius 300 m is banked at an angle of 15°. If the

coefficient of friction between the wheels of a race-car and the road is 0.2,
what is the
(a) optimum speed of the race car to avoid wear and tear on its tyres, and
(b) maximum permissible speed to avoid slipping ?
(a) (b)
 Chapter 5
Work ,Energy and Power

⃗ and ⃗𝐁
1.Define scalar product or Dot Product two vectors 𝐀 ⃗.
⃗A ⋅ ⃗B = AB cosθ

2.Some properties of dot product.

𝑖̂ ⋅ 𝑖̂ = 𝑗̂ ⋅ 𝑗̂ = 𝑘̂ ⋅ 𝑘̂ = 1
𝑖̂ ⋅ 𝑗̂ = 𝑗̂ ⋅ 𝑘̂ = 𝑘̂ ⋅ 𝑖̂ = 0
⃗ ⋅A
A ⃗ = A2

⃗ 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐁
3.If two vectors 𝐀 ⃗⃗ are perpendicular, then their dot product will
be…………..
zero ( ⃗A ⋅ ⃗B = A B cos 90 = 0)

4.Define work.
The work done by the force is defined to be the product of component of
the force in the direction of the displacement and the magnitude of this
displacement.
W = ⃗F ⋅ ⃗d
5.Write the situations in which work done by a body is zero
(i) when the displacement is zero .
(ii )when the force is zero.
(iii) the force and displacement are mutually perpendicular
W=Fd cos 90 = 0.

6.Give an example for zero Work.

When you push hard against a rigid brick wall, the force you exert on the
wall does no work.
A weightlifter holding a 150 kg mass steadily on his shoulder for 30 s
does no work on the load during this time.

7.Give an example for Positive Work

Workdone by Gravitational force on a freely falling body is positive

8.Give an example of Negative work

The the work done by friction is negative (cos 180 o = –1).
9.Find out the sign of the workdone in following cases.
a)Workdone by a man in lifting a bucket out of a well.
Positive
b)Workdone by friction on a body sliding down an inclined plane
Negative
c)Workdone by an applied force on a body moving on a rough horizontal
surface
Positive
d)Workdone by the resistive force on air on a vibrating pendulum
Negative
e)Workdone gravitational force during the motion of an object on a
horizontal surface.
Zero

10. What is the work done by centripetal force on a body moving in

circular path
Zero. Here θ = 90 o , W =Fd cos 90 = 0.
11. 1 horse power,1HP= -----------Watt.
746W
2. 1 kilowatt-hour, 1kWh = ------------------ J
3.6 × 106 J
13. Kilowatt-hour is the unit of -------------
Energy
14.Find the workdone by a force 𝐅 = (𝟑𝐢̂+ 𝟒𝐣̂ - 𝟓𝐤̂ ) N , if the displacement
Produced is
̂ ) m.
𝐝 = (𝟓𝐢̂+ 𝟒𝐣̂ + 3𝐤
W =F ⃗ . ⃗d
𝑊 = 𝐹𝑥 𝑑𝑥 + 𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑦 + 𝐹𝑧 𝑑𝑧
= (3 x 5 )+ (4x4 ) + (-5 x3)
W= 16 J
15. The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its motion is called---------
Kinetic energy
16. The energy stored by virtue of the position or configuration of a
body(state of strain) is called-------------
Potential Energy.
17. Calculate the work done in lifting a body of mass 10kg to a height of
10m above the ground
W= F x d = mg x h =10 x 9.8 x10 =980J
18. Two bodies of masses 𝐦𝟏 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐦𝟐 have same momenta. What is the
ratio of their kinetic energies?
 1 p2
KE, K = mv 2 =
2 2m
p2 p2
K1 = K2 =
2 m1 2 m2
K1 / K 2 = m2 /m1
K1 : K 2 = m2 : m1
19. A light body and heavy body have same momenta, Which one has
greater kinetic energy?
p2
KE, K =
2m
1
K ∝
m
Lighter body will have more Kinetic energy.
19. A light body and heavy body have same KE, Which one has greater
momentum? 𝑝 = √2𝑚𝐾
p ∝ √𝑚
Heavier body will have more momentum.
20.Power is the scalar product of force and -------------
Velocity ( P= F .v)
21.Write the characteristics of conservative forces.
▪ A conservative force can be derived from a scalar quantity.
− 𝑑V
F= where V is a scalar
dx
▪ The work done by a conservative force depends only upon initial and
final positions of the body
▪ The work done by a conservative force in a cyclic process is zero
22.Give two examples for conservative forces
Eg: Gravitational force, Spring force.

23.Give two examples for non conservative forces.

Frictional force , air resistance are non conservative forces.

24. State and prove the law of conservation of mechanical energy for a
freely falling body.
The total mechanical energy of a system is conserved if the forces, doing
work on it, are conservative.
Consider a body of mass m falling freely from a height h
 At Point A
PE = mgh
KE = 0 (since v=0)
TE= mgh + 0
TE= mgh-----------(1)
At Point B
PE = mg (h-x)
KE = ½ mv 2
v 2 = u2 + 2as
u=0, a=g , s= x
v 2 = 2gx
KE = ½ m x 2gx =mgx
TE = mg (h-x) + mgx
TE = mgh--------------(2)
At Point C
PE = 0 (Since h=0
KE = ½ mv 2
v 2 = u2 + 2as
u=0, a=g , s= h
2
v = 2gh
KE = ½ m x 2gh=mgh
TE = 0 + mgh
TE = mgh--------------(3)
From eqns (1), (2) and (3), it is clear that the total mechanical energy is
conserved during the free fall.

25.Show that the gravitational potential energy of the object at height h, is

completely converted to kinetic energy on reaching the ground.
PE at a height h, V = mgh
When the object is released from a height it gains KE
K = ½ mv 2
v 2 = u2 + 2as
u=0, a=g , s=h
v 2 = 2gh
K = ½ m x 2gh
K= mgh
26.The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its motion is
called …………….. Kinetic energy
27.The eneegy possessed by a body by virtue of the position or
configuration of a body is called ………………….. Potential energy.

28.A body at a height h above the surface of earth possesses …………………

due to its position. Potential energy.

29.A Stretched or compressed spring possesses ………………… due to its

state of strain. potential energy

30.State and prove work-energy theorem

The work-energy theorem can be stated as :The change in kinetic energy
of a particle is equal to the work done on it by the net force.
Proof
For uniformly accelerated motion
v 2 − u 2 = 2 as
1
Multiplying both sides by 𝑚, we have
2
1 1
mv − mu2 = mas = Fs
2
2 2
Kf -Ki = W
Change in KE = Work

31.In a ballistics demonstration a police officer fires a bullet of mass 50.0 g

with speed 200 m s-1 on soft plywood of thickness 2.00 cm. The bullet
emerges with only 10% of its initial kinetic energy. What is the emergent
speed of the bullet ?
32.State Hooke’s law for a spring
Hooke’s law states that ,for an ideal spring, the spring force F is
proportional displacement x of the block from the equilibrium position.
F = − kx
The constant k is called the spring constant. Its unit is N𝑚−1

33.Derive the expression for potential energy of a spring

Then the spring force F = − kx

The work done by the spring force is
x
W = ∫0 F dx
x
W = − ∫0 kx dx
1
W = − kx 2
2
This work is stored as potential energy of spring
1
PE = kx 2
2
34.Draw the graphical variation of kinetic Energy and potential of a spring

35.Write Einstein’s mass energy relation.

E = m 𝐜𝟐

36.Find the amount of energy is associated with 1 kilogram of matter

E = m c2
E = 1×(3 × 108 )2 J
E= 9 × 1016 J.
37.Write the expression for instantaneous power in dot product form
dW
P=
dt
The work done, dW = F. dr.
dr
P =F.
dt
P= F . v
Instantaneous power is the dot product of force and velocity.

38.An elevator can carry a maximum load of 1800 kg (elevator +

passengers) is moving up with a constant speed of 2 m s–1. The frictional
force opposing the motion is 4000 N. Determine the minimum power
delivered by the motor to the elevator in watts as well as in horse power.
The downward force on the elevator is F = m g + Frictional Force
= (1800 × 10) + 4000
= 22000 N
Power, P = F. v
= 22000 × 2
= 44000 W
In horse power, power = 44000/746
=59 hp

39.Differentiate Elastic and inelastic collisions.Give examples for each.

The collisions in which both linear momentum and kinetic energy are
conserved are called elastic collisions.
Eg: Collision between sub atomic particles
The collisions in which linear momentum is conserved, but kinetic
energy is not conserved are called inelastic collisions. . Part of the initial
kinetic energy is transformed into other forms of energy such as
heat,sound etc..
Eg: Collision between macroscopic objects

40.For elastic collisions in one dimension show that the relative velocity
before collision is numerically equal to relative velocity after collision.
By the conservation of momentum
m1 u1 + m2 u2 = m1 v1 + m2 v2 --------------(1)
m1 u1 − m1 v1 = m2 v2 − m2 u2
m1 (u1 − v1 ) = m2 (v2 − u2 )----------------(2)

By the conservation of kinetic energy

1 1 1 1
m1 u12 + m2 u22 = m1 v12 + m2 v22 -----------(3)
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
m1 u12 − m1 v12 = m2 v22 − m2 u22
2 2 2 2
1 1
m1 (u1 − v1 ) = m2 (v2 − u22 )
2 2 2
2 2
m1 (u1 − v1 ) = m2 (v22 − u22 )
2 2
-------------(4)
(4) m1 (u21 −v21 ) m2 (v22 −u22 )
Eqn ------------ =
(2) m1 (u1 −v1 ) m2 (v2 −u2 )
(u1 +v1 ) (u1 −v1 ) (v2 +u2 )(v2 −u2 )
=
(u1 −v1 ) (v2 −u2 )
u1 + v1 = v2 + u2 -------------(5)
u1 − u2 = −(v1 − v2 )--------(6)
i.e., relative velocity before collision is numerically equal to relative
velocity after collision.
41.For elastic collisions of a moving mass 𝐦𝟏 with the stationary mass 𝐦𝟐
write the expression for momentum conservation and kinetic energy
conservation

Equation for conservation of momentum in x direction

m1 u1 = m1 v1 cosθ1 + m2 v2 cosθ2
Equation for conservation of momentum in y direction
0 = m1 v1 sinθ1 − m2 v2 sin θ2
Equation for conservation of kinetic energy,(KE is a scalar quantity)
1 1 1
m1 u12 = m1 v12 + m2 v22
2 2 2
 𝐂𝐡𝐚𝐩𝐭𝐞𝐫 𝟔
𝐒𝐲𝐬𝐭𝐞𝐦𝐬 𝐨𝐟 𝐏𝐚𝐫𝐭𝐢𝐜𝐥𝐞𝐬 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐑𝐨𝐭𝐚𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧𝐚𝐥 𝐌𝐨𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧

1.Define centre of mass

The centre of is a hypothetical point where the entire mass of an object
may be assumed to be concentrated to visualise its motion.
2.Write the expression for position vector of centre of mass of an n particle
system
⃗ = m1 r⃗1 +m2 r⃗2 +⋯……..+mn r⃗n
R
M

where M =m1 + m2 +…….+mn

3.Write the expression for velocity of centre of mass of an n particle
system
⃗V = m1 v⃗1 +m2 v⃗2 +⋯……..+mn v⃗n --------------(2)
M

where M =m1 + m2 +…….+mn

4.Write the expression for acceleration of centre of mass of an n particle
system
⃗⃗⃗A = m1 a⃗1 +m2 a⃗2 +⋯……..+mn a⃗n ………………(3)
M

where M =m1 + m2 +…….+mn

5.When the total external force on the system is zero the velocity of the
centre of mass remains constant or the CM of the system is
in…………………… uniform motion.
6.Define vector product or cross product of two vectors 𝐀 ⃗ and ⃗𝐁
⃗
Vector product of two vectors ⃗A and ⃗B is defined as
⃗A x ⃗B = AB 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝜽 n̂
where A and B are magnitudes of A ⃗ and B
⃗
𝜽 is the angle between ⃗A and ⃗B
𝑛̂ is the unit vector perpendicular to the plane containing A ⃗ and B
⃗
7.Some properties of vector product
⃗ xA
▪ A ⃗ =0 ⃗
▪ 𝑖̂ × 𝑖̂ = 0 , 𝑗̂ × 𝑗̂ = 0 , 𝑘̂ × 𝑘̂ = 0
▪ 𝑖̂ × 𝑗̂ = 𝑘̂ , 𝑗̂ × 𝑘̂ = 𝑖̂, 𝑘̂ × 𝑖̂ = 𝑗̂
▪ 𝑗̂ × 𝑖̂ = −𝑘̂ , 𝑘̂ × 𝑗̂ = −𝑖̂, 𝑖̂ × 𝑘̂ = −𝑗̂
𝟖. . 𝐖𝐫𝐢𝐭𝐞 𝐭𝐡𝐞 𝐫𝐞𝐥𝐚𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧 𝐜𝐨𝐧𝐧𝐞𝐜𝐭𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐚𝐧𝐠𝐮𝐥𝐚𝐫 𝐯𝐞𝐥𝐨𝐜𝐢𝐭𝐲 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝐢𝐭𝐬 𝐥𝐢𝐧𝐞𝐚𝐫 𝐯𝐞𝐥𝐨𝐜𝐢𝐭𝐲.
⃗⃗v = ω
⃗⃗ × r
𝟗. 𝐃𝐞𝐟𝐢𝐧𝐞 𝐀𝐧𝐠𝐮𝐥𝐚𝐫 𝐚𝐜𝐜𝐞𝐥𝐞𝐫𝐚𝐭𝐢𝐨𝐧
Angular acceleration α
⃗ is defined as the time rate of change of angular
velocity.
⃗⃗⃗
𝑑𝜔
𝛼= unit rad/𝑠 2 or rad 𝑠 −2
𝑑𝑡
10.The rotational analogue of force is ----------------
Torque or Moment of force
11.Write the equation for torque or moment of force
𝜏=𝑟xF ⃗⃗
12.The handle of the door is always fixed at the edge of the door which is
located at a maximum possible distance away from hinges. Give reason.
𝜏 = 𝑟 x ⃗⃗F =rF sin𝜃
When r is maximum ,torque will be maximum.
The handle is fixed at the edge to increase r and hence to make torque
maximum.
13.Find the torque of a force 𝟕𝐢̂ + 𝟑𝐉̂ − 𝟓𝐤 ̂ about the origin. The force acts
on a particle whose position vector is 𝐢̂ − 𝐉̂ + 𝐤 ̂.
𝜏 = 𝑟 x ⃗⃗F
𝜏 = (î − Ĵ + k̂) x(7î + 3Ĵ − 5k̂)

+ - +
î 𝐽̂ 𝑘̂
𝜏 =|1 −1 1 |
7 3 −5
τ⃗ = î [(−1 x − 5) −(3 x 1) ] - Ĵ [(1x-5)- (7x1)] + k̂ [(1x3) -(7x-1)]
τ⃗ = î [5 - 3] - Ĵ [-5 – 7] + k̂ [3 – -7]
τ⃗ = 2î +12 Ĵ + 10k̂
14.Angular momentum is the rotational analogue of ---------------
linear momentum.
15. Write the relation connecting angular momentum and linear
momentum.
𝑙 =r×p ⃗
16.The moment of linear momentum is called ---------------
Angular momentum

17.Write the relation connecting torque and angular momentum

𝑑𝑙
𝜏=
𝑑𝑡
18. Deduce the relation connecting torque and angular momentum
(or) Show that the time rate of change of the angular momentum of a
particle is equal to the torque acting on it.
𝑙 =𝑟×𝑝
𝑑𝑙 d
Differentiating = (r×p
⃗ )
𝑑𝑡 dt

𝑑𝑙 dr⃗ ⃗
dp
= ×p
⃗ + rx
𝑑𝑡 dt dt
dr⃗ ⃗
dp
⃗ = mv
p ⃗ , =v
⃗ , ⃗⃗
=F
dt dt
𝑑𝑙
=v ⃗ + r x ⃗⃗F
⃗ × mv
𝑑𝑡
⃗ = 0 , (r x ⃗⃗F =τ⃗ )
⃗ ×v
v
𝑑𝑙
=0 + 𝜏
𝑑𝑡

ⅆ𝒍
⃗ =
𝝉
ⅆ𝒕

19.The time rate of change of the angular momentum of a particle is equal

to the --------------- acting on it. Torque
20.State and prove the law of conservation of angular momentum
If the total external torque on a system of particles is zero, then the total
angular momentum of the system is conserved i.e, remains constant.
⃗
dL
τ⃗ext =
dt

If external torque, τ⃗ext = 0 ,

⃗
dL
=0
dt
⃗ = constant
L
21.Write an example of a motion in which angular momentum remains
constant
Motion of planets around sun.

22.What do you mean by equilibrium of a rigid body?

A rigid body is said to be in mechanical equilibrium, if it is in both
translational equilibrium and rotational equilibrium.

23.What is translational equilibrium?

When the total external force on the rigid body is zero, then the total
linear momentum of the body does not change with time and the body will
be in translational equilibrium .
24.What is rotational equilibrium?
When the total external torque on the rigid body is zero, the total angular
momentum of the body does not change with time and the body will be in
rotational equilibrium .
25.What is partial equilibrium?
A body may be in partial equilibrium, i.e., it may be in translational
equilibrium and not in rotational equilibrium, or it may be in rotational
equilibrium and not in translational equilibrium.

26.Define a couple.
A pair of equal and opposite forces with different lines of action is known
as a couple. A couple produces rotation without translation.
27.State the principle of moments.

The lever is a system in mechanical equilibrium.

For rotational equilibrium the sum of moments must be zero,
d1 F1 − d2 F2 = 0
𝐝𝟏 𝐅𝟏 = 𝐝𝟐 𝐅𝟐
28.What is centre of gravity of a body?
The Centre of gravity of a body is the point where the total gravitational
torque on the body is zero.

29. Moment of Inertia is the rotational analogue of ------------

Mass.

30.The rotational analogue of mass is called---------------------

Moment of Inertia
31. Mass is a measure of ------------------ and moment of inertia is a measure
of -------------------------
Inertia , Rotational inertia
32. Writ the expression for moment of inertia of a particle of mass m
rotating about an axis
I =mr 2
33. Write the equation for rotational kinetic energy.
1
Rotational kE = Iω2
2
34. What do you mean by radius of gyration ?
The radius of gyration can be defined as the distance of a mass point from
the axis of roatation whose mass is equal to the whole mass of the body
and whose moment of inertia is equal to moment of inertia of the whole
body about the axis.
I =Mk 2
I
k=√
M

35.The moment of inertia of a disc of mass ‘M’ and radius R about an axis
𝐌𝐑𝟐
passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane is .
𝟐
What is the radius of gyration of this case.
I
k=√
M

MR2
R2 𝑅
k=√ 2
=√ =
M 2 √2

36.What is a flywheel?
A disc with a large moment of inertia is called a flywheel. It is used in
machines, that produce rotational motion.
37.Write the rotational analogue of the following equations in
translational motion
38.A cord of negligible mass is wound round the rim of a flywheel
mounted on a horizontal axle as shown in figure.
Calculate the angular acceleration of the wheel if steady
pull of 25N is applied on the cord. Moment of inertia of
𝑴𝑹𝟐
flywheel about its axis=
𝟐
MR2 20 x 0.22
I= = =0.4 kgm2
2 2
Torque , τ = force xperpendicular distance
τ = 25 x0.2 = 5Nm
τ=I∝
τ 5
∝= = =12.5rad/s2
I 0.4

39.A girl rotates on a swivel chairas shown below.

a)what happens to her angular speed when she
stretches her arms
b) what happens to her angular speed when she
folds her arms
c)Name and state the conservation law applied for
your justification

a)When she stretches her arms, the moment of inertia increases and hence
the angular speed decreases.
b)When she folds her arms, the moment of inertia decreases and hence the
angular speed increases.
c) Law of conservation of angular momentum.
If the total external torque on a system of particles is zero, then the total
angular momentum of the system is conserved i.e, remains constant.
( If τ⃗ext = 0 , ⃗L = 𝐼𝜔⃗ = constant .When I increases 𝜔 ⃗ decreases
and vice versa)
 Chapter 7
Gravitation
1.State Kepler’s first law of planetary motion(Law of orbits )
All planets move in elliptical orbits with the Sun situated at one of the foci
of the ellipse.
2.State Kepler’s second law of planetary motion(Law of areas)
The line that joins any planet to the sun sweeps equal areas in equal
⃗⃗
ΔA
intervals of time. i.e, areal velocity is constant
Δt
3.Kepler’s second law (law of areas) is a consequence of conservation of
………………………. angular momentum.
4.Prove Kepler’s second law of planetary mtion.
The area swept out by the planet of mass
m in time interval Δt is
ΔA⃗ = 1 (r × v
⃗ Δt)
2
⃗ = mv
p ⃗ ,
⃗
p
⃗ =
v
m
⃗⃗
ΔA 1 ⃗
p
= (r × )
Δt 2 m
⃗L = r × p
⃗
⃗⃗
ΔA ⃗
L
=
Δt 2m
Here angular momentum,⃗⃗⃗L is a constant.
⃗⃗
ΔA
= constant
Δt
This is the law of areas.
5.State Kepler’s third law of planetary motion(Law of periods)
The square of the time period of revolution of a planet is proportional to
the cube of the semi- major axis of the ellipse traced out by the planet.
T 2 ∝ a3
6.Prove Kepler’s third law of planetary mtion.
(R+h)3
Period of a satellite, T= 2π√
GM
3
2 (R+h)
T 2 = 4π
GM
4π2
T2= (R + h)3
GM
T 2 ∝ (R + h)3
T 2 ∝ a3
Which is Kepler’s Law of Periods.
7.State Universal Law of Gravitation
Every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force which is
directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely
proportional to the square of the distance between them .
𝐦𝟏 𝐦𝟐
𝐅=𝐆 𝟐
𝐫
8. The value of Gravitational Constant.
G = 6.67×10−11 N m2 /kg 2
9.Define acceleration due to gravity of the Earth
The acceleration gained by a body due to the gravitational force of
earth is called acceleration due to gravity.

10. Obtain the expression for acceleration due to gravity on the surface of
the earth (or) Obtain the relation connecting g and G.
Consider a body of mass m on the surface of earth of mass M and radius R.
The gravitational force between body and earth is given by
GMm
F = 2 -----------(1)
R
By Newton’s second law
F=mg
where g is acceleration due to gravity
From Eq (1) and (2)
GMm
mg =
R2
𝐆𝐌
g= 𝟐
𝐑
11.The average value of g on the surface of earth is -------. 9.8ms−2 .
12. Acceleration due to gravity is independent of------------( mass of the
body/mass of earth).
mass of the body
13.A man can lift a mass of 15kg on earth.What will be the maximum mass
that can be lifted by him by applying the same force on moon.
6x15 =90kg
1
(Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon is times that on
6
earth. So he can lift 6 times massive objects on the surface of moon)

14.A mass of 30kg is taken from earth to moon. What will be its mass and
weight on the surface of moon
Mass on the moon=30kg (mass remains the same)
30 𝑥9.8
Weight on the moon = =49N
6
15.Obtain the expression for Acceleration due to gravity at a height h
above the surface of the earth.
On the surface of earth
GM
g = 2 ------------(1)
R
At a height above the surface of earth
GM
gh = 2 ----------(2)
(R+h)
For , h << R
GM
gh = h
R2 (1+R)2
GM h
gh = 2 (1 + )−2
R R
Substituting from eq(1)
h
g h = g(1 + )−2
R
Using binomial expression and neglecting higher order terms.
2h
g h ≅ g (1 − )
R
16.Derive the expression for acceleration due to gravity at a depth d below
the surface of the earth
We assume that the entire earth is of uniform density. Then mass
of earth
Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of
earth
GM
g= 2 -------------(1)
R
4
But M= πR3 ρ
3
G 4
g= ( πR3 ρ)
R2 3
4
g = πRρG ---------------(2)
3
Acceleration due to gravity at a depth d below the surface of earth
4
g d = π(R − d)ρG ---------(3)
3
4
eq(3) gd 3
π(R−d)ρG
------ = 4
eq(2) g πRρG
3
gd (R−d)
=
g R
d
g d = g(1 − )
R
17.The acceleration due gravity ---------------(decreases/increases) , as we
go above earth’s surface and ---------------(decreases/increases) ,as we go
down below earth’s surface.
Decreases ,Decreases.
18.The acceleration due gravity is ---------------------at the centre of earth.
Zero
19.At what height the value of acceleration due to gravity will be half of
that on surface of earth. (Given the radius of earth R =6400km)
h
. g h = g(1 + )−2
R
g
gh =
2
g h
= g(1 + )−2
2 R
1 h −2
= (1 + )
2 R
h 2
2 = (1 + )
R
h
√2 =1 + R
h
= √2-1
R
h = (√2-1) R = (1.414 -1) 6400 = 2650 km
20.Calculate the value of acceleration due to gravity at a height equal to
half of the radius of earth.
GM
gh = 2
(R+h)
R
h=
2
GM GM
gh = R 2
= 3 2
(R+ 2 ) (2R)
GM 4 GM 4
=9 = = 𝑔
R2 9 R2 9
4
21.Obtain the expression for gravitational potential energy at a point.
Gravitational potential energy at point is defined as the work done in
displacing the particle from infinity to that point without acceleration.

Gravitational force on a mass m at a distance x

GMm
F= 2
x
The work done to give a displacement dx to the mass
dW=Fdx
GMm
dW= 2 dx
x
Total work done to move the mass from ∞ to r
 r GMm
W =∫∞ dx
x2
r 1
W = GMm ∫∞ dx
x2
−GMm
W=
r
This work is is stored as gravitational PE in the body.
−𝐆𝐌𝐦
U=
𝐫

22.Define gravitational potential at a point on earth. Obtain the expression

for gravitational potential
The gravitational potential at a point is defined as the potential energy of a
particle of unit mass at that point.
The gravitational Potential energy of a body of mass m at a distance r
−GMm
U=
r
For unit mass m=1
−𝐆𝐌
So gravitational potential, V=
𝐫

23.What is escape speed(escape velocity)?

The minimum speed required for an object to reach infinity i.e. to escape
from the earth’s gravitational pull is called escape speed.

24.Derive the expression for escape speed.

1 GMm
mvi2 - =0
2 r
1 GMm
mvi2 =
2 R
2GM
vi2 =
R
2GM
ve = √ or ve = √2gR
R
25.𝐄𝐬𝐜ape velocity is independent of ……………(mass of the body/mass of
the earth) Mass of the body.
26.Write thevalue of e𝐬𝐜𝐚𝐩𝐞 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝 (𝐨𝐫 𝐞𝐬𝐜𝐚𝐩𝐞 𝐯𝐞𝐥𝐨𝐜𝐢𝐭𝐲) on the surface of
earth . 11.2km/s

27.Moon has no atmosphere. Why?

The escape speed of moon is about 2.3 km/s. which is less than the
average speed of gas molecules of moon. Thus gas molecules escape from
surface of moon and it has no atmosphere.
28.What are sarth Satellites?
Earth satellites are objects which revolve around the earth.
29.……………. is the natural satellite of earth . Moon
30.What are the uses of artificial satellites?
Artificial satellites are used for telecommunication, geophysics and
meteorology etc.
31.Derive the expression for orbital speed of a satellite
The speed with which a satellites revolves around earth is called orbital
speed.
Consider a satellite of mass m in a circular orbit of a distance (R + h) from
the centre of the earth.
Fcentripetal = Fgravitational
mv2 GMm
=
R+h (R+h)2
2 GM
v =
(R+h)
GM
𝑣𝑜 = √
(R+h)
If the satellite is very close to earth (R+h) ≈R
𝐆𝐌
𝒗𝒐 = √ or 𝒗𝒐 = √𝒈𝑹
𝐑
32.Write the relation connecting escape velocity and orbital velocity
GM
Orbital Velocity ,v0 = √
R
2GM
Escape Velocity ,ve = √
R
𝐯𝐞 = √𝟐 𝐯𝐨
Escape Velocity = √2 x Orbital Velocity
33.Derive the expression for period of a satellite
Period of a satellite is the time required for a satellite to complete one
revolution around the earth in a fixed orbit.
circumference of the orbit
Period T=
𝑜𝑟𝑏𝑖𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑
2𝜋 (𝑅+ℎ)
T= GM
√(R+h)

(𝑹+𝒉) 𝟑
T=𝟐𝝅√
𝐆𝐌
If the satellite is very close to earth (R+h) ≈R
𝑹 𝟑
T=𝟐𝝅√
𝐆𝐌
 Chapter 8
Mechanical Properties of Solids
1.Define Elasticity
The property of a body, by virtue of which it tends to regain its original
size and shape when the applied force is removed, is known as elasticity
and such substances are called elastic .
Eg: Steel, Rubber
2.Which is more elastic, steel or rubber?
Steel
3.Define plasticity
Substances have no tendency to regain their previous shape on the
removal of deforming force are called plastic and this property is called
plasticity. Eg:Putty and mud
4.Define Stress
The restoring force per unit area is known as stress.
𝐹
Stress =
𝐴
The SI unit of stress is N 𝑚−2 or pascal (Pa)
5.Define Strain
Strain is defined as the fractional change in dimension.
𝐶ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑑𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛
Strain =
𝑂𝑟𝑖𝑔𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑑𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛

Strain has no unit and dimension.

6.Wrte three types of stress and strain.
1. Longitudinal Stress and Longitudinal Strain
2. Shearing Stress and Shearing Strain
3. Hydraulic Stress and Hydraulic Strain (Volume Strain)
7.Define longitudinal stress
Longitudinal stress is defined as the restoring force per unit area when
force is applied normal to the cross-sectional area of a cylinder.
𝑭
Longitudinal stress=
𝑨
8. Define Longitudinal strain
Longitudinal strain is defined as the ratio of change in length(ΔL) to
original length(L) of the body .
Change in length
Longitudinal strain =
Original length

𝚫𝐋
Longitudinal strain =
𝑳
9.Define shearing stress.
Shearing stress is defined as the restoring force per unit area when a
tangential force is applied on the cylinder.
𝐅
Shearing stress=
𝐀
10.Define Shearing strain.

Shearing strain is defined as the ratio of relative displacement of the faces

Δx to the length of the cylinder L
𝚫𝐱
Shearing strain = =tanθ = θ
𝑳

11.Define hydraulic stress or volume stress

The restoring force per unit area of solid sphere, placed in the fluid is
called hydraulic stress.
F
Hydraulic stress= = -P (pressure)
A
12.Define volume strain (hydraulic strain)
Volume strain(hydraulic strain) is defined as the ratio of change in volume
(ΔV) to the original volume (V).
Change in volume
Volume strain=
Original volume
𝚫𝐕
Volume strain=
𝐕
13.State Hooke’s Law
For small deformations the stress is directly proportional to strain. This is
known as Hooke’s law.
Stress ∝ Strain
𝐒𝐭𝐫𝐞𝐬𝐬
=𝒌
𝐬𝐭𝐫𝐚𝐢𝐧
The constant k is called Modulus of Elasticity.
The SI unit of modulus of elasticity is N 𝑚−2 or pascal (Pa)

14.Define modulus of elasticity. Write its unit.

Stress
Modulus of elasticity =
strain
Unit =N 𝑚−2 or pascal (Pa)
15.The stress-strain curve for a metal is given in figure. Mark
1)Elastic limt (or) yield point 2) Fracture point 3) Proportional
limit 4)Elastic region 5) Plastic region 6)permanent set
7) yield strength (𝑺𝒚 ) 8) ultimate tensile strength (𝑺𝒖 )

16.Define young’s eodulus(Y)

The ratio of longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain is defined as Young’s
modulus of the material .
longitudinal stress
Y=
longitudinal strain
𝐹
𝐴
Y= ΔL
𝐿
𝑭𝑳
Y=
𝐀 𝚫𝐋
17.Youngs modulus of steel is …………………….(greater/less) than that of
rubber
Greater than
18.Define shear modulus or rigidity modulus(G)
The ratio of shearing stress to the corresponding shearing strain is called
the shear modulus or Rigidity modulus of the material .
Shearing stress
G=
Shearing strain
𝐹 𝐹
𝐴 𝐴
G= Δx =
𝜃
𝐿
𝑭
G=
𝐀𝜽

19.Define bulk modulus(B)

The ratio of hydraulic stress to the corresponding hydraulic strain is called
bulk modulus.
Hydraulic stress
B=
Hydraulic strain
 𝐹
𝐴 −𝑃
B= ΔV = ΔV
𝑉 𝑉
−𝑷𝑽
B=
𝚫𝐕

20.Define compressibility(k)
The reciprocal of the bulk modulus is called compressibility.
1
k=
𝐵
−𝟏 𝚫𝐕
k=
𝐏 𝐕
▪ The compressibility is the least for solids and the most for gases.
▪ The bulk modulus is the least for gases and the most for solids.
21.Why steel is preferred in heavy-duty machines and in structural
designs?
Young’s modulus of steel is greater than that of copper, brass and
aluminium. So steel is more elastic than copper, brass and aluminium. So
steel is preferred in heavy-duty machines and in structural designs
22.The stress-strain graphs for materials A and B are shown in Figure.

(d) Which of the materials has the greater Young’s modulus?

(e) Which of the two is the stronger material?
(f) Which of the two materials is more ductile?
stress
(d) Young’s modulus Y= = slpoe of the graph.
strain
Slope of graph for material A is greater than that of B.
So materials A has the greater Young’s modulus.
(e) Strength of a material is determined by the amount of stress
required to cause fracture.
The fracture point is greater for material A.
So material A is stronger than B
(f) The fracture point is far apart for material A than B.
So material A is more ductile than B.
23..The stress-strain graph for three materials A B and C are shown below
Which is more elastic A ,B or C. Justify your
answer.

Material A is more elastic

stress
Modulus of elasticity = = slpoe of the graph
strain
Slope of graph for material A is greater than that of B and C
So material A is more elstic.
24.A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of 1.0 m. A
100 kN force stretches it along its length. Calculate (a) stress, (b)
elongation, and (c) strain on the rod. Young’s modulus, of structural steel
is 2.0 × 𝟏𝟎𝟏𝟏 N 𝒎−𝟐
𝐹 𝐹
(c) stress= = 2
𝐴 𝜋𝑟
100 𝑥 103 100 𝑥 103
= =
3.14 𝑥 (10 𝑥 10−3 )2 3.14 𝑥 10−4

=3.18 x108 N𝑚−2

𝐹𝐿
(d) Y=
A ΔL
𝐹
(𝐴)𝐿 3.18 x108 𝑥 1
ΔL = =
Y 2× 1011

= 1.59 x10−3 m
= 1.59 mm
ΔL
(c) Strain =
𝐿
1.59 x10−3
=
1

= 1.59 x10−3 m
25.A square lead slab of side 50 cm and thickness 10 cm is subject to a
shearing force (on its narrow face) of 9.0 × 𝟏𝟎𝟒 N. The lower edge is
riveted to the floor. How much will the upper edge be displaced? Given
shear modulus, G =𝟓. 𝟔 × 𝟏𝟎𝟗 𝐍𝐦−𝟐
 .

𝐹 9.0 × 104 9.0 × 104

Stress= = =
A 0.5 x0.1 0.05
6 −2
= 1.80 × 10 N 𝑚
stress
G = Δx
𝐿
𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑥 𝐿
Δx =
G
1.80 × 106 𝑥 0.5
= = 1.6 × 10−4 m = 0.16 mm
5.6 × 109

26.The average depth of Indian Ocean is about 3000 m. Calculate the

fractional compression, ΔV/V, of water at the bottom of the ocean, given
that the bulk modulus of water is 2.2 × 𝟏𝟎𝟗 N 𝒎−𝟐 . (Take g = 10 m 𝒔−𝟐 )
−𝑃
G = ΔV
𝑉
ΔV P
=
𝑉 𝐺
P = hρg = 3000 x1000 𝑥10 = 3𝑥107 N 𝑚−2
ΔV 3𝑥107
= 9 = 1.36 × 10−2
𝑉 2.2 × 10
27.Define Poisson’s ratio
The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain is called Poisson’s ratio.
𝐿𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑙 𝑆𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛
Poisson’s Ratio 𝜎 =
𝐿𝑜𝑛𝑔𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑆𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑖𝑛
∆𝑑
𝑑
𝜎= ∆𝐿
𝐿
∆𝑑 𝐿
𝜎= 𝑥
∆𝐿 𝑑
′
𝑃𝑜𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑜𝑛 𝑠 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 ℎ𝑎𝑠 𝑛𝑜 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑑𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛.
28.Cranes used for lifting and moving heavy loads have a thick metal rope .
Why?
This is due to the fact that metals have greater youngs modulus.
29.The metal ropes used in cranes are always made of a number of thin
wires braided together.Why?
In cranes thicker rope of radius about 3 cm is recommended. A single wire
of this radius would practically be a rigid rod. So the ropes are always
made of a number of thin wires braided together, like in pigtails, for ease
in manufacture, flexibility and strength.
30.The maximum height of a mountain on earth is ~10 km. Why?
The height of mountain is limited by the elastic properties of rocks.
31.Write the expression for bending δ produced in the beam shown below.
How can we reduce bending?

𝐖 𝒍𝟑
δ= (W=mg)
𝟒𝒃ⅆ𝟑 𝒀
The bending reduces by
▪ Using a material with a large Young’s modulus Y
▪ Increasing the breadth b of the beam
▪ Increasing depth d of the beam.
32.What is buckling?
The sidewise bending of a deep bar is called buckling.

33.Why beams with cross-sectional shape of I is used for construction of

bridges?

▪ This sections prevents buckling of beams

▪ This section provides a large load bearing surface and enough depth
to prevent bending.
▪ This shape reduces the weight of the beam without sacrificing the
strength This shape reduces the cost.
 Chapter 9
Mechanical Properties Of Fluids

1.Write two basic difference between Liquids and Gases

▪ A liquid is incompressible whereas gas is compressible
▪ A liquid has a free surface of its own ,but gas has no free surface.
2.Define pressure.
The normal force(F) exerted by a fluid on an area A is called pressure.
F
Pressure, P =
A
Pressure is a scalar quantity.

3.What do you mean by atmospheric pressure?

The pressure exerted by the atmosphere at sea level.
1 atm = 1.013 × 105 Pa.

4.Define density?
Density ρ for a fluid of mass m occupying volume V is given by
m
ρ=
V
5.Define relative density
The relative density of a substance is the ratio of its density to the density
of water at 40 C.
Density of substance
Relative density= 0
Density of water at 4 C

It is a dimensionless positive scalar quantity.

6.Write the expression for absolute pressure P, at depth below the surface
of a liquid open to the atmosphere.
Absolute Pressure, P = Pa + ρ gh
7.Write the expreassion for gauge pressure
Gauge pressure, P - Pa = ρ gh
8.What is the pressure on a swimmer 10 m below the surface of a lake?
h = 10 m
ρ = 1000 kg m−3 Take g = 10 m s−2
P = Pa + ρ gh
= 1.01 × 105 + 1000 × 10 × 10
= 1.01 × 105 + 1 × 105
= 2.01 × 105 Pa ≈ 2 atm
9.At a depth of 1000 m in an ocean
(a) what is the absolute pressure?
(b) What is the gauge pressure?
(The density of sea water is 1.03 × 𝟏𝟎𝟑 kg 𝐦−𝟑 , g = 10m 𝐬−𝟐 )
h = 1000 m , ρ = 1.03 × 𝟏𝟎𝟑 kg 𝐦−𝟑
(c) Absolute pressure, P = Pa + ρgh
= 1.01 × 105 + 1.03 × 103 × 10 × 1000
= 1.01 × 105 + 103 × 105
= 104.01 × 105 Pa ≈ 104 atm
(d) Gauge pressure , P −Pa = ρgh
= 1.03 × 103 × 10 × 1000
= 103 × 105 Pa ≈ 103 atm
10.The device used to measure Atmospheric Pressure.
Mercury barometer is used to measure Atmospheric Pressure.
11.The device used to measure Guage pressure or pressure differences
An open-tube manometer is a used for measuring Guage pressure or
pressure differences.
12.State Pascal’s law for transmission of fluid pressure.
Whenever external pressure is applied on any part of a fluid contained in a
vessel, it is transmitted undiminished and equally in all directions.
13.Briefly explain the working of hydraulic lift.

The pressure on smaller piston

F1
P= --------------(1)
A1
This pressure is transmitted equally to the larger cylinder with a larger
piston of area A2 producing an upward force F2 .
F2
P= --------------(2)
A2
F1 F2
From eq(1) and (2) =
A1 A2
𝐀𝟐
𝐅𝟐 = 𝐅𝟏 𝐀𝟏
14. A hydraulic automobile lift is designed to lift cars with a maximum
mass of 3000kg. The area of cross section of the piston carrying 425 c𝒎𝟐 .
What maximum pressure would the smaller piston have to bear?
Pressure on two two pistons will be same.
F1 F2
P= =
A1 A2
F2 mg
P= =
A2 A2
2000 𝑥 9.8
= =6.92 x105 N𝑚−2 or Pa
425 x10−4
15.Two syringes of diffrent cross sections (without needles) filled with
water are connected with a tightly fitted rubber tube filled with water.
Diameters of the smaller piston and larger piston are 1.0 cm and 3.0 cm
respectively. Find the force exerted on the larger piston when a force of 10
N is applied to the smaller piston.
A
F2 = F1 2
A1
2
π x (1.5 x 10−2 )
F2 = 10 x
π x (0.5 x 10−2 )2
= 10 x9 =90 N
16.What do you mean by streamline flow (Steady Flow)?
The flow of the fluid is said to be steady if at any given point, the velocity
of each passing fluid particle remains constant in time.
17.What is turbulent flow?
Beyond a limiting speed called critical speed, the flow of fluid loses
steadiness and is called turbulent flow.

18.Obtain the expression for equation of continuity for streamline flow of a

fluid.

The mass of liquid flowing out = The mass of liquid flowing in

ρP AP vP Δt = ρQ AQ vQ Δt = ρR AR vR Δt
If the fluid is incompressible ρP = ρQ = ρR
AP vP = AQ vQ = AR vR
Av = constant
19.The equation of continuity and it is a statement of conservation of
……………. in flow of incompressible fluids.
mass
20. State and prove Bernoulli’s Principle
Bernoulli’s principle states that as we move along a streamline, the sum of
the pressure , the kinetic energy per unit volume and the potential energy
per unit volume remains a constant.
𝟏
𝐏 + 𝛒𝐯 𝟐 + 𝛒𝐠𝐡= constant
𝟐
Proof

The total work done on the fluid is

W1 + W2 = P1 ΔV - P2 ΔV
𝐖𝟏 + 𝐖𝟐 = (𝐏𝟏 - 𝐏𝟐 )ΔV-----------------(1)

The change in its kinetic energy is

𝟏
ΔK =. 𝐦(𝐯𝟐𝟐 − 𝐯𝟏𝟐 ) ---------------(2)
𝟐

The change in gravitational potential energy is

ΔU= mg(𝐡𝟐 -𝐡𝟏 )------------------(3)
By work – energy theorem
W1 + W2 = ΔK + ΔU
𝟏
(𝐏𝟏 - 𝐏𝟐 )ΔV = 𝐦(𝐯𝟐𝟐 − 𝐯𝟏𝟐 )+ 𝐦𝐠(𝐡𝟐 -𝐡𝟏 )-------------(4)
𝟐
𝑚
Divide each term by ΔV to obtain ( = ρ)
ΔV
1
P1 - P2 = ρ(v22 − v12 )+ ρg(h2 -h1 )
2
1 1
P1 – P2 = ρv22 − ρv12 + ρgh2− ρgh1
2 2
1 1
P1 + ρv12 + ρgh1 = P2 + ρv22 + ρgh2
2 2
𝟏
𝐏 + 𝛒𝐯 𝟐 + 𝛒𝐠𝐡= constant
𝟐
21.State Torricelli’s law of speed of efflux of fluid
Torricelli’s law states that the speed of efflux of fluid through a small hole
at a depth h of an open tank is equal to the speed of a freely falling body
i.e, √2gh

22.Prove Torricelli’s law of speed of efflux of fluid.

According to Bernoulli principle

1 1
P1 + ρv12 + ρgh1 = P2 + ρv22 + ρgh2
2 2
𝐻𝑒𝑟𝑒 v2 = 0.
1
Pa + ρv12 + ρgy1 = P+ ρgy2
2
1
ρv12 = ρg(y2 − y1 ) + P − Pa
2
y2 − y1 = h
1
ρv12 = ρgh + P − Pa
2
2(P−Pa )
v12 = 2gh +
ρ
2(P−Pa )
v1 = √ 2gh +
ρ
If the tank is open to the atmosphere, then P = Pa
v1 = √ 2gh

23.Explain Magnus Effect.

The relative velocity of air above the ball is larger and below it is smaller.
This difference in the velocities of air results in the pressure difference
between the lower and upper faces and there is a net upward force on the
ball. This dynamic lift due to spining is called Magnus effect.
24.What is an aerofoil and how a dynamic lift is produced on aircraft wing

Aerofoil is a solid piece shaped to provide an upward dynamic lift when it

moves horizontally through air. When the aerofoil moves against the wind,
the flow speed of air on top is higher than that below it. There is an
upward force resulting in a dynamic lift of the wings and this balances the
weight of the plane.
25.Define viscosity
The internal frictional force that acts when there is relative motion
between layers of the liquid is called viscosity.
26.Obtain the expression for Coefficient of viscosity( 𝛈)

The coefficient of viscosity( η)for a fluid is defined as the ratio of shearing

stress to the strain rate.
F
Shearing stress A
η= = 𝑣
Strain rate
𝑙
𝐅𝒍
𝛈=
𝐯𝐀
27.The viscosity of liquids …………………. with temperature while the
viscosity of gases ……………….. in the case of gases.
Decreases, increases
28.State Stokes’ Law
Stokes’ law states that the viscous drag force F on a sphere of radius a
moving with velocity v through a fluid of coefficient of viscosity η is,
F = 6πηav
29.What terminal velocity?
For an object falls through a viscous medium, when viscous force plus
buoyant force becomes equal to the weight of the body, the net force and
acceleration become zero. Then the object descends with a constant
velocity called terminal velocity.
30.Obtain expression for terminal velocity.

Consider a raindrop in air. The forces acting on the drop are

4
1. Weight acting downwards , FG = πa3 ρg (mg)
3
4
2. Buoyant force acting upwards, FB = πa3 σg
3
3. Viscous force, FV = 6πηav
In equilibrium,
4 4
6πηav + πa3 σg = πa3 gρ
3 3
4
6πηav = πa3 (ρ −σ)g
3
𝟐𝐚𝟐 (𝛒 −𝛔)𝐠
Terminal velocity , 𝐯𝐭 =
𝟗𝛈
31.The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm falling through a
tank of oil at 𝟐𝟎𝟎 C is 6.5 cm 𝐬−𝟏 . Compute the viscosity of the oil at 𝟐𝟎𝟎 C.
Density of oil is 1.5 × 𝟏𝟎𝟑 kg 𝐦−𝟑 , density of copper is 8.9 × 𝟏𝟎𝟑 kg 𝐦−𝟑 .
vt = 6.5 × 10−2 ms −1 ρ = 8.9 × 103 kg m−3
a = 2 × 10−3 m σ =1.5 ×103 kg m−3
g = 9.8m s −2 ,
2a2 (ρ −σ)g
vt =
9η
2a2 (ρ −σ)g
η=
9vt
2
2 x (2 × 10−3 ) (8.9 × 103 −1.5 ×103 )x9.8
η=
9 x 6.5 × 10−2

η =9.9 × 10−1 kg m−1 s−1

32.Write the Reynolds Number.
𝛒𝐯𝐝
𝐑𝐞 =
𝛈
R e <1000 – The flow is streamline or laminar.
R e > 2000 − The flow is turbulent .
R e between 1000 and 2000-The flow becomes unsteady .
33.Define surface tension
Surface tension is a force per unit length (or surface energy per unit area)
acting in the plane of the interface between the plane of the liquid and any
other substance.
𝐅𝐨𝐫𝐜𝐞
Surface Tension, S=
𝐋𝐞𝐧𝐠𝐭𝐡

▪ The SI Unit is Nm−1

▪ Dimensional formula is MT −2 .
34.The surface tension of a liquid …………………….. with temperature.
decreases
35.Show that surface tension is equal to surface energy per unit area.

Inorder to keep the bar in its original position some work has to be done
against this inward full.
W = F x d----------(1)
If the surface energy of the film is S per unit area, the extra area is 2d𝑙 (film
has two sides),
The extra surface energy = S x 2d𝑙 ------------(2)
The extra surface energy = work done
S x2d𝑙 =Fd
F
S = = surface tension
2𝑙
36.Some effects of surface Tension
▪ Oil and water do not mix.
▪ Water wets you and me but not ducks.
▪ Mercury does not wet glass but water sticks to it.
▪ Oil rises up a cotton wick, inspite of gravity.
▪ Sap and water rise up to the top of the leaves of the tree.
▪ Hairs of a paint brush do not cling together when dry and even when
dipped in water but form a fine tip when taken out of it.
37.Define angle of contact
The angle between tangent to the liquid surface at the point of contact and
solid surface inside the liquid is termed as angle of contact(θ)
▪ Angle of contact is obtuse for Water on a waxy or oily surface,
Mercury on any surface.
▪ Angle of contact is acute for Water on glass or on plastic, Kerosene
oil on virtually anything .

38.Draw the angle of contact when

a) the liquid wets the solid.
b) the liquid does not wet the solid.

a)
When angle of contact, θ is an obtuse
angle(greater than 90)

b)
When angle of contact,θ is an
acute angle (less than 90).

39.Why are small drops and bubbles spherical?

Due to surface tension ,liquid surface has the tendency to reduce surface
area. For a given volume sphere has minimum surface area. So small drops
and bubbles are spherical.

40.Why are large drops and bubbles not spherical, but flattened?
For large drops the effect of gravity predominates that of surface tension
and they get flattened.
41.Derive the expression for excess pressure inside a spherical drop
Work done in expansion= Force x Displacement
= Excess pressure x Area x Displacement
W = (Pi - Po ) x 4πr 2 x Δr ------------------(1)

This workdone is equal to the increase in surface energy

Extra Surface energy = Surface tension x Increase in
surface area
Extra surface energy = S x 8πrΔr ------------------(2)
The workdone = extra surface energy
(Pi - Po ) x 4πr 2 xΔr = 8πrΔr S --------------(3)
𝟐𝐒
(𝐏𝐢 - 𝐏𝐨 ) =
𝐫

42.Write the expression for excess pressure inside a liquid bubble

A bubble has two free surfaces.
2S
(Pi - Po ) = 2x
r
𝟒𝐒
(𝐏𝐢 - 𝐏𝐨 ) =
𝐫
43.What is capillary rise? What is the phenomenon responsible for it?
Water rises up in a capillary tube dipped in a liquid in spite of gravity. This
is called capillary rise.
Surfacetesion is responsible for capillary rise.
44.Obtain an expression for capillary rise

The excess pressure on the concave meniscus

2S
(Pi - Po ) =
r
a a
cosθ = , r=
r cosθ
2S
(Pi - Po ) = a
cosθ
2Scosθ
(Pi - Po ) = ----------------(1)
a
Consider two points A and B in the same horizontal level i.e, the points are
at the same pressure.
 Pressure at A = Pi
Pressure at B = Po + h ρ g
Pi =Po + h ρ g
Pi - Po = h ρ g----------------(2)
From eq(1) and (2)
2Scosθ
h ρ g=
a
𝟐𝐒𝐜𝐨𝐬𝛉
h=
𝛒 𝐠𝐚

44.What is capillary depression?

When liquid level lower in the capillary tube dipped in a liquid ,it is called
capillary fall or capillary depression.

45.Why mercury shows capillary depression?

For mercury, angle of contact θ will be obtuse . Then cos θ is negative and
hence value of h will be negative. So mercury shows capillary depression.

46.Find the capillary rise when a capillary tube of radius 0.05 cm is dipped
vertically in water. Surface tension for water is 0.073N𝒎−𝟏 .Density of
water is 1000 kg𝒎−𝟑 .
2Scosθ
h=
ρ ga
For water-glass angle of contact θ = 0, cos 0 =1
2S
h=
ρ ga
2𝑥 0.073
h=
1000 𝑥 9.8 𝑥 0.05 𝑥10−3

h = 2.98 × 10−2 m = 2.98 cm.

47.How soaps and detergents helps to remove dirts from clothes

The molecules of detergents produce a water-oil interface which reduces
the surface tension (water-oil) and dirt can be removed by running water.
 Chapter 10
Thermal Properties of Matter
1.Write the relation connecting temperature on Fahrenheit scale and
Celsius scales .
tF −32 t
= C
180 100
2.Write the relation connecting temperature on Kelvin and Celsius scales .
T = t C + 273.1

3.Temperature of a normal human body is 98.60F. What is the

corresponding temperature in Celsius scale?
98.6−32 t
= C
180 100

(98.6−32)x100
tC = = 370C
180

4.State Boyle’s law

At constant temperature , the pressure of a quantity of gas is inversely
proportional to volume.
1
P∝
V
PV = constant.
5.State Charles’ law
At constant pressure , the volume of a quantity of gas is directly
proportional to temperature .
V∝T
𝐕
= constant
𝐓

6.Write Ideal gas equation

𝐏𝐕= 𝛍𝐑𝐓
where, μ is the number of moles in the sample of gas.
R is called universal gas constant: R = 8.31 J mol−1 K −1

7.What do you mean by absolute zero temperature or zero kelvin (OK)

The minimum temperature for an ideal gas is called Absolute temperature
or zero kelvin(OK). This temperature is found to be – 273.15 °C
8.What is thermal expansion
The increase in the dimensions of a body due to the increase in its
temperature is called thermal expansion.
9.Write the expression for coefficient of linear expansion
Δl
𝛼𝑙 =
𝑙 ΔT
10.Write the expression for coefficient of area expansion
ΔA
αa =
A ΔT
11.Write the expression for coefficient of volume expansion
ΔV
αv =
VΔT
12. Obtain the relation between 𝛂𝐥 and 𝛂𝐚
ΔA
αa =
A ΔT
ΔA = (𝑙 + 𝛥𝑙)2 - 𝑙 2
ΔA =2 l Δl (Neglecting term (Δl)2 )
A= 𝑙 2
2 𝑙 𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑎 =
𝑙 2 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑎 = 2
𝑙 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝑙 𝛥𝑇
=𝛼𝑙
𝜶𝒂 = 𝟐 𝜶𝒍
13.Relation between 𝛂𝐥 and 𝛂𝐯
ΔV
αv =
VΔT
ΔV = (𝑙 + Δl)3 - 𝑙 3
ΔV = 3 𝑙 2 Δl (Neglecting terms (Δl)2 and (Δl)3 )
V = 𝑙3
3 𝑙 2 𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑣 =
𝑙 3 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝛼𝑣 = 3
𝑙 𝛥𝑇
𝛥𝑙
𝑙 𝛥𝑇
= 𝛼𝑙
𝜶𝒗 = 𝟑 𝜶𝒍

14.What is the ratio of 𝛂𝐥 , 𝛂𝐚 𝐚𝐧𝐝 𝛂𝐯

αl : αa : αv = 1: 2: 3
15.Based on the graph given below explain the anomalous expansion of
water.

Water exhibits an anomalous behavour; it contracts on heating from 0 °C

to 4 °C. When it is heated after 4 °C ,it expands like other liquids.
This means that water has minimum volume and hence maximum density
at 4 °C .
16.Why the bodies of water, such as lakes and ponds, freeze at the top
first?
This is due to anomalous expansion of water. water has minimum volume
and hence maximum density at 4 °C .
As a lake cools toward 4 °C, water near the surface becomes denser, and
sinks. Then the warmer, less dense water near the bottom rises. When
this layer cools to 0 °C, it freezes, and being less dense, remain at the
surfaces.
17.Define heat capacity
Heat capacity (S) of a substance is the amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of the substance by one unit.
ΔQ
S=
ΔT
Unit is JK −1
18.Define specific heat capacity
Specific heat capacity (s) of a substance is the amount of heat required to
raise the temperature of unit mass of the substance by one unit.
1 ΔQ
s=
m ΔT
Unit is Jkg −1 K −1
19.Define molar specific heat capacity
Molar Specific heat capacity (C) of a substance is the amount of heat
required to raise the temperature of one mole of the substance by one
unit.
1 ΔQ
C= Unit is Jmol−1 K −1
μ ΔT
20.Why gases have two specific heat capacities ?
As gas is compressible, heat transfer can be achieved by keeping either
pressure or volume constant. So gases have two types of molar specific
heat capacities,Cp and Cv

21.efine molar specific heat capacity at constant pressure 𝐂𝐩

Molar specific heat capacity at constant pressure of a substance is the
amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one mole of the
substance by one unit keeping its pressure constant.
1 ΔQ
Cp = ( )
μ ΔT p
22.Define molar specific heat capacity at constant volume 𝐂𝐯
Molar specific heat capacity at constant volume of a substance is the
amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one mole of the
substance by one unit keeping its volume constant.
1 ΔQ
Cv = ( )
μ ΔT v
23.Write the specific heat capacity of water.
4186 is Jkg −1 K −1
24.Water is used as a coolant in automobile radiators as well as a heater in
hot water bags.Why?
Specific heat capacity of water is very high equal to 4186 is Jkg −1 K −1 .

25.Measurement of heat is called………………

Calorimetry
26.A device in which heat measurement can be made is called a
………………….. Calorimeter.
27.Write the names of following phase trasitions.
Change of state
Solid to Liquid Melting
Liquid to Solid Fusion
Liquid to Gas Vaporisation
Gas to Liquid Condensation
Solid to Gas Sublimation

28.The temperature at which the solid and the liquid states of the
substance coexist in thermal equilibrium with each other is called its -------
------
melting point.
29.Melting point ------------ with increase in pressure .
decreases

30.The temperature at which the liquid and the vapour states of the
substance coexist in thermal equilibrium is called its---------------
boiling point.
31. The boiling point increases with increase in pressure and decreases
with decreases in pressure.
32 .Cooking is difficult on hills. Give reason.
The boiling point decreases with decreases in pressure. At high altitudes,
atmospheric pressure is lower, boiling point of water decreases as
compared to that at sea level. So cooking is difficult.

33.Cooking is faster using a pressure cooker. Give reason

The boiling point increases with increase in pressure.
Boiling point is increased inside a pressure cooker by increasing the
pressure. Hence cooking is faster.

34.Define Sublimation. Give an example of a substance that sublime.

The change from solid state to vapour state without passing through the
liquid state is called sublimation.
Eg: Dry ice (solid CO2 ) , Iodine ,Camphor
35.Define Latent Heat
The amount of heat per unit mass transferred during change of state of the
substance is called latent heat of the substance for the process.
Q
L=
m
SI unit of Latent Heat is J k𝑔−1
36.Define Latent Heat of Fusion (𝐋𝐟 )
The latent heat for a solid -liquid state change is called the latent heat of
fusion (Lf ) or simply heat of fusion.
Lf of water = 3.33 × 105 J k𝑔−1 .
37.Define Latent Heat of Vaporisation (𝐋𝐯 )
The latent heat for a liquid-gas state change is called the latent heat of
vaporisation
(Lv ) or heat of vaporisation.
Lv of water= 22.6 × 105 J k𝑔−1
38. Calculate the amount of heat energy required to convert10kg of water
at 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 C to steam at 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 C.
Q
Lv =
m
Q =Lv m
Q =22.6 × 105 x 10
Q =22.6 × 106 𝐽
39.Why burns from steam are usually more serious than those from
boiling water?
For water, the latent heat of vaporisation is Lv = 22.6 × 105 J k𝑔−1 .
So, steam at 100 °C carries 22.6 × 105 J k𝑔−1 more heat than water at 100
°C. This is why burns from steam are usually more serious than those from
boiling water.
40.The graph given below represents the temperature versus heat for
water at 1 atm pressure. Answer the following questions.

(i)Fill up the table

Graph Process Phase(state)
BC ------------ Ans:Melting ------------- Ans: solid + liquid
DE ------------ Ans: Vaporisation -------------Ans: liquid + gas

Graph Phase
AB ---------- Ans: Solid (ice)
CD ---------- Ans: Liquid(water)
EF ---------- Ans: Gas(steam)

(ii)The heat energy corresponding to BC is called ------------

Latent heat of fusion
(iii)The heat energy corresponding to DE is called ------------
Latent heat of Vaporisation
(iv)The slope of AB and CD are different.Why?
Different slopes indicates that specific heat capacity of ice and water are
different.
▪ When slope of graph is less, it indicates a high specific heat capacity .
▪ Slope of CD is less than that of AB ,i.e., specific heat capacity of water
is greater than that of ice.

41 a).Write different modes of heat transfer.

conduction, convection and radiation.
b)Identify the modes of heat transfer and ,B and C.

42.What is conduction?
Conduction is the mechanism of transfer of heat between two adjacent
parts of a body because of their temperature difference.
43.Write the expression for rate of flow of heat if one end of a metallic rod
is heated

T −T
H=KA c D
L
The constant of proportionality K is called the thermal conductivity of the
material.
44.Some cooking pots have copper coating on the bottom. Give reason.
Thermal conductivity of copper is high and it promotes the distribution of
heat over the bottom of a pot for uniform cooking.
45.Why a brass tumbler feels much colder than a wooden tray on a chilly
day?
Thermal conductivity of brass(metal) is greater than that of wood.
46.Houses made of concrete roofs get very hot during summer days.Why?
Thermal conductivity of concrete is moderately high.
47.What is convection?
Convection is a mode of heat transfer by actual motion of matter. It is
possible only in fluids.
48.Give examples for natural convection
Sea breeze, Land breeze, Trade wind
49.Explain sea breeze.
Sea breeze is due to natural convection.
During the day, the ground heats up more quickly than large water bodies.
This is due to greater specific heat capacity of water. The air in contact
with the warm ground is heated . It expands, becomes less dense and rises
. Then cold air above sea moves to fill this space and is called as sea
breeze .
50.Explain land breeze
Land breeze is due to natural convection.
At night, the ground loses its heat more quickly, and the water surface is
warmer than the land. The air in contact with water is heated. It expands,
becomes less dense and rises . Then cold air above the ground moves to
fill this space and is called as land breeze .
51.Give examples for forced convection.
Forced-air heating systems in home
The human circulatory system
The cooling system of an automobile engine.
52.What is radiation?
The mechanism for heat transfer which does not require a medium is
called radiation.
53.Heat is transferred to the earth from the sun through empty space as
………………… Radiation.
54.We wear white or light coloured clothes in summer.Why?
White colour absorb the least heat from the sun.
55.During winter, we use dark coloured clothes .Why?
Dark colours absorb heat from the sun and keep our body warm.
56.The bottoms of the utensils for cooking food are blackened .Why?
Black colour absorbs maximum heat from the fire and give it to the
vegetables to be cooked.
57.Explain the principle of thermo bottles.
It consists of a double-walled glass vessel with the inner and outer walls
coated with silver. Radiation from the inner wall is reflected back into the
contents of the bottle. The outer wall similarly reflects back any incoming
radiation.
58.What is a black body?
An object that absorbs all radiations falling on it at all wavelength is called
a blackbody. A blackbody, also emits radiations of all possible wavelength.
59.What are blackbody radiation?
The radiations emitted by blackbody are called blackbody radiations.
60.State Wien’s displacement law.
The wavelength λm for which energy emitted by a blackbody is the
maximum , is inversely roportional to the temperarure.This is known as
Wien’s Displacement Law.
1
λm α
T
𝛌𝐦 𝐓 = constant
The constant is called Wien’s constant and its value is 2.9 x 10−3 mK.
61.State Stefan-Boltzmann law
The energy emitted by a radiator (black body) per unit time is given by
H = AeσT 4
where A - the area of the body, T - temperature of bod
E - the emissivity, σ = Stefan-Boltzmann constant =5.67 x10−8 Wm−2 K −4
62.State Newton’s law of cooling
Newton’s Law of Cooling says that the rate of loss of heat(rate of cooling)
of a body is proportional the difference of temperature of the body and the
𝐝𝐐
surroundings. − = 𝐤(𝐓𝟐 − 𝐓𝟏 )
𝐝𝐭
Where T1 is the temperature of the surrounding medium
T2 is the temperature of the body
k is a positive constant depending upon the area and nature of the surface
of the body
63.Draw the curve showing cooling of hot water with time
 Chapter 11
Thermodynamics
1.What do you mean by thermal equilibrium?
A system is said to be in thermal equilibrium with itself if the temperature
of the system remains constant.

2.State Zeroth law of thermodynamics

Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics states that ‘two systems in thermal
equilibrium with a third system separately are in thermal equilibrium with
each other’.
i. e, If TA = TC and TB = TC then TA = TB
3..State first law of Thermodynamics
The heat supplied to the system is partly used to increase the internal
energy of the system and the rest is used to do work on the environment .
ΔQ = ΔU + ΔW
4.First law of thermodynamics is in accordance with law of conservation
of----------------------.
Energy
5.Derive the relation connecting 𝐂𝐩 and 𝐂𝐯 or Derve Mayer’s relation
Molar specific heat capacity at constant volume,
ΔQ
Cv = ( )
ΔT v
ΔQ = ΔU
ΔU
Cv = ---------(1)
ΔT
Molar specific heat capacity at constant pressure
ΔQ
Cp = ( )
ΔT p
ΔQ = ΔU + P ΔV
ΔU ΔV
Cp = ( ) + (P ΔT)
ΔT p p
ΔU ΔV
Cp = + (P ) ------------(2)
ΔT ΔT p
PV = RT
ΔV
P (ΔT) =R
p
ΔU
Cp = + R
ΔT
Substituting from eq(1) Cp = Cv +R
𝐂𝐩 − 𝐂𝐯 = 𝐑
This is called Mayer’s relation.
𝟔. 𝐂𝐩 𝐢𝐬 𝐚𝐥𝐰𝐚𝐲𝐬 𝐠𝐫𝐞𝐚𝐭𝐞𝐫 𝐭𝐡𝐚𝐧 𝐂𝐯 . Why
When gas is heated at constant volume, the entire heat is used to increase
the internal energy of the gas. But when the gas is heated at constant
pressure, the heat is used to increase the internal energy and also to do
external work during expansion. Hence Cp is greater than Cv .
7.What are thermodynamic state variables?
Every equilibrium state of a thermodynamic system is completely
described by specific values of some macroscopic variables. These are
called thermodynamic state variables.
Eg: pressure, volume, temperature, mass , composition,Entropy, Enthalpy
8.What do you mean by equation of state?
The connection between the state variables is called the equation of state.
9.Write the e quation of statefor an ideal gas
PV=μRT
10.What are extensive variables?
The thermodynamic variables which indicate the ‘size’ of the system are
called extensive variables. Eg:Internal energy, Volume , Mass
11.What are intensive variables?
The thermodynamic variables which do not indicate the ‘size’ of the
system are called intensive variables. Eg: Pressure, Temperature , Density
12.What is a quasi-static process?
The name quasi-static means nearly static.
A quasi-static process is an infinitely slow process such that the system
remains in thermal and mechanical equilibrium with the surroundings
throughout.
Eg: Processes that are sufficiently slow and do not involve accelerated
motion of the piston, large temperature gradient, etc.
13.Different thermodynamic processes

14.Write the equation of state for an isothermal process.

PV = constant
15.Write the equation of state for an adiabatic process.
PV γ = constant
16.Derive the expression for work done by an ideal gas during an
isothermal process.
v
W =∫v 2 P dV
1
PV= μRT
μR T
P=
V
v μR T
W =∫v 2 dV
1 V
v 1
W =μ R T ∫v 2 dV
1 V
v
W = μR T [ln V]v21
W = μR T [ln V2 − ln V1 ]
V
W = μRT ln [ 2 ]
V1
17.Derive the expression for workdone by an Ideal gas during an adiabatic
process
v
W =∫v 2 P dV
1
PV γ = k
k
P= γ =k V −γ
V
v
W= k ∫v 2 V −γ dV
1
v
V−γ+1 2
W = k[ ]
−γ+1 v
1
k
W= [v 1−γ − v11−γ ]
1−γ 2
1 k k
W= [ − ]
1−γ v2 γ−1 v1 γ−1
PV γ = k
P1 V1 γ= P2 V2 γ =k
1 P2 V2 γ P1 V1 γ
W= [ − ]
1−γ v2 γ−1 v1 γ−1
1 μR
W= [ P2 V2 − P1 V1 ] (or) W= [ T2 − T1 ]
1−γ 1−γ
18.Workdone in an isochoric process is ------------ Zero
19.Work done by the gas in an Isobaric process
Δ W=P ΔV
W = P (V2 − V1 )
20.What is a cyclic process?
In a cyclic process, the system returns to its initial state.
Since internal energy is a state variable, ΔU = 0 for a cyclic process
21.State Kelvin-Planck statement of second law of thermodynamics
No process is possible whose sole result is the absorption of heat from a
reservoir and the complete conversion of the heat into work.
22.State Clausius statement of second law of thermodynamics
No process is possible whose sole result is the transfer of heat from a
colder object to a hotter object.
23.What is a reversible processes?
A thermodynamic process is reversible if the process can be turned back
such that both the system and the surroundings return to their original
states, with no other change anywhere else in the universe.
Eg: A quasi-static isothermal expansion of an ideal gas in a cylinder
fitted with a frictionless movable piston is a reversible process.
24.What is an irreversible processes?
A thermodynamic process is irreversible if the process cannot be turned
back such that both the system and the surroundings return to their
original states, with no other change anywhere else in the universe.
The spontaneous processes of nature are irreversible.
▪ Eg:The free expansion of a gas
▪ The combustion reaction of a mixture of petrol and air ignited by a
spark .
▪ Cooking gas leaking from a gas cylinder in the kitchen diffuses to the
entire room. The diffusion process will not spontaneously reverse
and bring the gas back to the cylinder.
25.What is the working substance of the Carnot engine.
Ideal gas.
26.Draw P-V diagram for a Carnot cycle .Also write different
thermodynamic processes involved in a Carnot cycle.

The four processes involved in

carnot cycle are
1.Isothermal Expansion
2. Adiabatic Expansion
3. Isothermal Compression
4. Adiabatic Compression
27.Write the expression for efficiency of Carnot engine
T −T T
η= 1 2 or η=1− 2
T1 T1
28.Obtain the expression for in a Carnot cycle
(a)Step1→2 Isothermal expansion of the gas from (P1 , V1 , T1 ) to (P2 , V2, T1 ).
V
W1→2 = Q1 = μ RT1 ln ⌊ 2 ⌋ ------------(1)
V1
(b) Step 2→ 3 Adiabatic expansion of the gas from (P2 ,V2,T1 ) to (P3 , V3, T2 ).
μR
W2→3 = [ T1 − T2 ] ------------------(2)
γ−1
(c)Step 3→4 Isothermal compression of the gas from(P3 ,V3 ,T2 ) to (P4 ,V4,T2 ).
V
W3→4 = Q 2 = − μ RT2 ln ⌊ 3 ⌋ -----------(3)
V4
(d) Step 4 → 1 Adiabatic compression of the gas from (P4 ,V4,T2 ) to (P1 ,V1 , T1 )
μR
W4→1 =− [T1 − T2 ] -----------------(4)
γ−1

Total work done by the gas in one complete cycle is

W= W1→2 + W2→3 + W3→4 + W4→1
V μR V μR
W= μ RT1 ln ⌊ 2 ⌋ + [ T1 − T2 ] − μ RT2 ln ⌊ 3 ⌋ − [ T1 − T2 ]
V1 γ−1 V4 γ−1
V2 V
W= μ RT1 ln ⌊ ⌋ − μ RT2 ln ⌊ 3 ⌋ -------------(5)
V1 V4
Q2
Efficiency, η=1−
Q1
V
μ RT2 ln ⌊ 3 ⌋
V4
η=1−
V
μ RT1 ln ⌊ 2 ⌋
V1
V3 V2
but =
V4 V1
T2
η=1−
T1
29.What is the efficiency of a Carnot engine working between
233K and 373K.
Or
What is the efficiency of a heat engine working between ice point
𝟎𝟎 𝐂 and steam point 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝐂 .
T −T
η= 1 2
T1
T1 = 100 + 273 = 3730C
T2 = 0 + 273 = 2730C
373− 273
η=
373
η =0.268=26.8%
 Chapter 12
Kinetic Theory
1.Real gases approach ideal gas behaviour at ………………………………………..
Low pressures and high temperatures.
2.State Dalton’s law of partial pressures
The total pressure of a mixture of ideal gases is the sum of partial
pressures. This is Dalton’s law of partial pressures.
3.Write any four postulates of kinetic theory of an Ideal Gas
▪
▪ A given amount of gas is a collection of a large number of molecules
that are in random motion.
▪ At ordinary pressure and temperature, the average distance between
molecules is very large compared to the size of a molecule (2 Å).
▪ The interaction between the molecules is negligible.
▪ The molecules make elastic collisions with each other and also with
the walls of the container .
▪ As the collisions are elastic , total kinetic energy and total momentum
are conserved .
▪ The average kinetic energy of a molecule is proportional to the
absolute temperature of the gas.
4.Derive the expression for pressure of an ideal gas

The change in momentum of the molecule = −mvx −mvx

= −2 mvx
Momentum imparted to wall in the collision = 2mvx
Distance travelled by the molecule in time Δt = vx Δt
Volume covered by the molecule = Avx Δt
No of molecules in this volume = n Avx Δt
(n is number density of molecules)
Only half of these molecules move in +x direction
1
So no of molecules = nA vx Δt
2

The number of molecules with velocity vx hitting the wall in time Δt

1
= nA vx Δt
2
The total momentum transferred to the wall
1
Q = (2mvx ) ( nA vx Δt )
2

Q = nmAvx 2 Δt
 Q
The force on the wall, F =
Δt
F = nmAvx 2
F
Pressure, P =
A
P = nmvx 2
All molecules in a gas do not have the same velocity; so average velocity is
to be taken
P= nmv̅̅̅2
x
̅̅̅ 1
vx2 =3 v̅̅̅2
1
P= nmv̅̅̅2
3
5.Show that the average kinetic energy of a molecule is proportional to the
absolute temperature of the gas.
1
P= nmv̅̅̅2
3
N
n= , N=nV
V
1
PV= Nmv̅̅̅2
3
where N is the number of molecules in the sample.
2 1
PV= (N mv̅̅̅2 )
3 2
2
PV= E---------------------(1)
3
Ideal gas equation, PV =Nk B T -------------------(2)
2
From eq(1)and (2) E = Nk B T
3
3
E = Nk B T
2
3
E/N = k B T
2
The average kinetic energy of a molecule is proportional to the absolute
temperature
6.Obtain the expression for Root Mean Square (rms) Speed of a molecule
of an ideal gas
3
E/N = k B T
2
1 3
mv̅̅̅2 = k B T
2 2
3k T
v̅̅̅2 = B
m

𝟑𝐤 𝐁 𝐓
𝐯𝐫𝐦𝐬 = √
𝐦
7.Estimate the average thermal energy of helium atom at a temperature of
𝟐𝟕𝟎 𝐂. (Boltzmann constant is 1.38 x 𝟏𝟎−𝟐𝟑 𝐉𝐊)
3
Average thermal energy(average kinetic energy) = k B T
2
(T=27+273=300K)
3
Average thermal energy = x 1.38 x 10−23 x 300
2
=6.21 x 10−21 J
8.Define degrees of freedom of a gas molecule?
The total number of independent ways in which a system can possess
energy is called degree of freedom.
A molecule has one degree of freedom for motion in a line.
Two degrees of freedom for motion in a plane.
Three degrees of freedom for motion in space.
9.State law of equipartition of energy
Law of Equipartition of Energy states that, in equilibrium, the total energy
is equally distributed in all possible energy modes, with each mode having
𝟏
an average energy equal to 𝐤 𝐁 T
𝟐
10.By using law of equipartiotion of energy obtain the values of specific
heat capacities of monoatomic gases. Also find the value of 𝛄
The molecule of a monatomic gas has only 3 translational degrees of
freedom.
1 3
Average energy of one molecule =3 𝑥 k B T = k B T
2 2
The total internal energy of one mole ,
3
U= k B T x NA
2
k B NA =R
3
U = RT
2
dU
Cv =
dt
d 3
= (2 RT)
dT
𝟑
𝐂𝐕 = R
𝟐

Mayer’s relation, CP – CV = R
CP = C V + R
3
= R +R
2
𝟓
𝐂𝐏 = R
𝟐
The ratio of specific heats
5
CP R
2
= γ = 3
CP R
2
𝟓
Adiabatic constant , 𝜸=
𝟑

11.By using law of equipartition of energy obtain the values of specific

heat capacities of rigid diatomic molecule. Also find the value of 𝛄
A diatomic rigid rotator has , 3 translational and 2 rotational degrees of
freedom.
1
Average energy of one molecule = 5 x k B T
2
5
= kB T
2
The total internal energy of one mole,
5
U= k B T x NA
2
k B NA =R
5
U = RT
2
dU
Cv =
dt
d 5
= (2 RT)
dT
𝟓
𝐂𝐕 = R
𝟐

Mayer’s relation, CP – CV = R
CP = CV + R
5
= R +R
2
𝟕
𝐂𝐏 = R
𝟐
The ratio of specific heats
7
CP 2
R
=γ= 5
CP R
2
𝟕
Adiabatic constant , 𝛄 =
𝟓

12.By using law of equipartition of energy obtain the values of specific

heat capacities of non rigid diatomic molecule. Also find the value of 𝛄
A non rigid diatomic molecule has , 3 translational , 2 rotational and 1
vibrational degrees of freedom.
1
(Each vibrational degree of freedom contributes ,2x k B T =k B T)
2
 5
Average energy of one molecule = k B T + k B T
2
7
= kBT
2

The total internal energy of one mole ,

7
U= k B T x NA
2
k B NA =R
7
U = RT
2
Specific heat capacity at constant volume
dU
Cv =
dt
d 7
= (2 RT)
dT
𝟕
𝐂𝐕 = R
𝟐

Mayer’s relation, CP – CV = R
CP = C V + R
7
= R +R
2
𝟗
𝐂𝐏 = R
𝟐
The ratio of specific heats
9
CP 2
R
= γ= 7
CP R
2
𝟗
Adiabatic constant , 𝛄=
𝟕

13.By using law of equipartition of energy obtain the values of specific

heat capacities of Polyatomic Gases. Also find the value of 𝛄
A polyatomic molecule has 3 translational, 3 rotational degrees of freedom
and a certain number ( f ) of vibrational modes.
3 3
Average energy of a molecule = k B T + k B T +f k B T
2 2

The total internal energy of a mole of such a gas is,

3 3
U=( k B T + k B T + f k B T ) NA
2 2
U=( 3 + f )k B TNA
( k B NA =R)
U=( 3 + f )RT
Specific heat capacity at constant volume
 dU
Cv =
dt
𝐂𝐕 =( 𝟑 + 𝐟 )𝐑
Specific heat capacity at constant pressure,
CP = CV + R
=( 3 + f )R +R
𝐂𝐏 =( 𝟒 + 𝐟 )𝐑
The ratio of specific heats
CP ( 4+f )R
γ= =(
CP 3 +f )R
( 𝟒+𝐟 )
Adiabatic constant , 𝛄 = (𝟑
+𝐟 )

14.By using law of equipartition of energy obtain the values of specific

heat capacity of of solids
Consider a solid of N atoms, each vibrating about its mean position.
1
A vibration in one dimension has average energy = 2x k B T
2
= kBT
In three dimensions, the average energy = 3k B T
The total internal energy of one mole of solid is,
U =3k B T x NA
k B NA =R
U =3RT
dU
Specific heat capacity C=
dt
d
= (3 RT)
dT

𝐂 = 𝟑𝐑

15.Define mean free path of a gas molecule.

The mean free path 𝑙 is the average distance covered by a molecule
between two successive collisions.
𝟏
𝒍= 𝟐
√𝟐𝐧𝛑𝐝
 Chapter 13
Oscillations
1.What is non periodic motion?
The motion which is non-repetitive .
e.g. rectilinear motion , motion of a projectile.
2.What is periodic motion?
A motion that repeats itself at regular intervals of time is called periodic
motion.
e.g. uniform circular motion , orbital motion of planets in solar system.
3.What is oscillatory motion?
Periodic to and fro motion is called oscillatory motion.
e.g. motion of a cradle , motion of a swing, motion of the pendulum of a
wall clock.
Every oscillatory motion is periodic, but every periodic motion need not be
oscillatory.
4.What is the difference between oscillations and vibration?
▪ When the frequency is small, we call it oscillation.
e.g.The oscillation of a branch of a tree
▪ When the frequency is high, we call it vibration.
e.g. The vibration of a string of a musical instrument.
5.What is period of oscillation?
The period T is the time required for one complete oscillation, or cycle.
Its SI unit is second.
6.What is frequency of oscillation?
The frequency ν of periodic or oscillatory motion is the number of
oscillations per unit time. It is the reciprocal of period .
𝟏
𝛎= The SI unit of ν is hertz ( Hz).
𝐓
7.Define amplitude of oscillation.
The maximum displacement from the mean poition is called amplitude
(A) of oscillation
8.Define Simple Harmonic Motion(SHM)
Simple harmonic motion is the motion executed by a particle subject to a
force, which is proportional to the displacement of the particle and is
directed towards the mean position.
9.Write a mathematical expression for an SHM. Explain the terms.
x (t) = A cos (ωt + 𝛟)
x (t) =displacement, A=amplitude , ω =angular frequency,
(ωt + ϕ) = phase , ϕ=phase constant or initial phase angle
10.Write the expression for angular frequency
2𝜋
ω= or ω =2𝜋𝜈
𝑇
Unit of ω is rad/s
Angular frequency is a scalar quantity
𝝅
11.An SHM is given by x = 8 sin(10𝝅𝒕 + ) m
𝟒
Find the (i) aplitude (ii)Angular frequency (iii)period
(iv)frequency(v) initial phase angle or phase constant
𝜋
x = 8 sin(10𝜋𝑡 + )
4
Comparing with general expression for SHM
x (t) = A cos (ωt + ϕ)
(i)Amplitude , A=8 m
(ii)Angular frequency , ω = 10𝜋 rad/s
2𝜋
(iii)ω =
𝑇
2𝜋 2𝜋
Period , T = = =1/5 s
ω 10𝜋
1 5
(iv)Frequency , 𝜈 = = =5Hz
T 1
𝜋
(v)Initial phase angle, ϕ = rad
4

12.Write the expression for velocity in Simple Harmonic Motion.

v = – ωA sin (ωt + ϕ)
13.Write the expression for acceleration in SHM
a =– 𝛚𝟐 x
In SHM, the acceleration is proportional to the displacement and is always
directed towards the mean position.
14.Obtain the expression for force for Simple Harmonic Motion
F = ma
a=– ω2 x
F = –m ω2 x
F = –kx -------------(4)
k
where k= m ω2 ; ω = √m

The force in SHM is proportional to the displacement and its direction is

opposite to the direction of displacement. Therefore, it is a restoring force.
15.Derive the expression for kinetic energy in Simple Harmonic Motion
1
K = mv 2
2
1
K = mv 2
2
v= – ω√A2 − x 2
v 2 = ω2 (A2 − x 2 )
1
K = mω2 (A2 − x 2 ) ----------------(5)
2
1
▪ At mean position,(x= 0), K = mω2 A2
2
KE is maximum At Mean position
▪ At extreme position,(x= A), K= 0.
KE is minimum At extreme positions.
16.Obtain the expression for potential energy in simple harmonic motion
1
U = kx 2
2
k= m ω2
1
U = mω2 x 2 ----------------(6)
2

▪ At Mean position, x= 0 , U = 0
PE is minimum At Mean position
1
▪ At Extreme position, x = A , U = mω2 A2
2
PE is maximum At extreme positions.
17.Derive the expression for total energy in SHM
E=U+K
1 1
E = mω2 x 2 + mω2 (A2 − x 2 )
2 2
1 1 1
E = mω2 x 2 + mω2 A2 − mω2 x 2
2 2 2
𝟏
E = m𝛚𝟐 𝐀𝟐
𝟐
The total mechanical energy of a harmonic oscillator is a constant or
independent of time.
18.Draw the variation of potential energy , kinetic energy k and the total
energy e with time t for a linear harmonic oscillator
19.At what position the KE of a simple harmonic oscillator becomes equal
to its potential energy?
KE =PE
1 1
mω2 (A2 − x 2 ) = mω2 x 2
2 2
A − x = x2
2 2

A2 = 2x 2
A2
x2 =
2
𝐀
x=
√𝟐
20.Give examples of systems executing simple harmonic motion
▪ Oscillations due to a Spring
▪ Oscillations of a simple pendulum
21.Define spring constant of a spring.
The restoring force per unit displacement of the spring is called spring
constant.
F mg
k= =
𝑥 𝑥
A stiff spring has large k and a soft spring has small k.
22.Derive the expression for period of oscillations of a spring

Restoring force, F = –k x
where k= mω2
k k
ω2 = , ω=√
m m
2π 2π
Period, T= =
ω
√k
m
𝐦
T = 𝟐𝛑√
𝐤
23.A 5 kg collar is attached to a spring of spring constant 500 N 𝒎−𝟏 . It
slides without friction over a horizontal rod. The collar is displaced from
its equilibrium position by 10.0 cm and released. Calculate
(a) the period of oscillation,
(b) the maximum speed and
(c) maximum acceleration of the collar.
(a) The period of oscillation as given by
m
T = 2π√
k
5
T = 2π√
500
1
T = 2x 3.14 x = 0.63 s
10

(b) The velocity of the collar executing SHM is

v = – ω√A2 − x 2
Maximum speed, v= Aω (at mean position ,x=0)
k
ω=√
m
k
v = A√
m
A=10cm = 0.1m
500
v = 0.1 x√
5
v= 0.1 x10 =1 m/s
(c) Acceleration in SHM
a=– ω2 x
Maximum acceleration, a= ω2 A (at extreme position)
k
ω2 =
m
k
a= A
m
500
a= x 0.1
5
a=10m/s2
24.Derive the expression for period of oscillations of a simple pendulum

τ = –L (mg sinθ ) --------------(1)

For rotational motion we have,
τ = I α -----------------(2)
From eqn (1) and (2)
 I α = –L mg sinθ
–mgL
α= θ ---------------(3) (since θ is very small, sinθ≈θ)
I

Acceleration of SHM , a=– ω2 x -------------------(4)

Comparing eqns (3) and (4)
mgL
ω2 =
I
I =mL2
mgL g
ω2 = 2 =
mL L
g
ω=√
L
2π 2π
Period, T= =
ω g
√L

𝐋
T = 𝟐𝛑√
𝐠

25.A girlis swinging on a swing in sitting position with period T. What will
happen to the period of oscillation when she stands up?
L
T = 2π√
g
When she stands up ,the length of the pendulum decreases and hence
period of oscillation decreases.
26.What is a seconds pendulum?
A simple pendulum of period T = 2 second is called a seconds pendulum.
27.What is the length of a simple pendulum, which ticks seconds? Or
What is the length of a seconds pendulum ?
A simple pendulum of period T = 2 second is called a seconds pendulum.
L
T = 2π√
g
l
T2 = 4π2
g
T2 g
L=
4π2

For seconds pendulum ,T = 2s

22 x 9.8
L= =0.994≈ 1m
4 x 3.142
 Chapter 14
Waves
1.The waves governed by Newton’s laws, and require a material medium
for their propagation are called ……………………..
Mechanical waves
E.g, water waves, sound waves, seismic waves, etc.
2.The waves which not require any medium for their propagation and
travel through vacuum at speed of light are …………………
Electromagnetic waves
Eg- visible light, ultraviolet light, radio waves, microwaves, x-rays etc.
3.The waves associated with moving electrons, protons, neutrons and
other fundamental particles are called…………..
Matter waves.
4.Write the characteristics of transverse waves
▪ In transverse waves, the constituents of the medium oscillate
perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation.

▪ They travel in the form of crests and troughs.

▪ Transverse waves can be propagated only in solids and strings, and
not in fluids.
▪ E.g, Waves on a stretched string,
5.Write the characteristics of longitudinal waves
▪ In longitudinal waves the constituents of the medium oscillate along
the direction of wave propagation.

▪ They travel in the form of compressions and rarefactions.

▪ Longitudinal waves can propagate in all elastic
media,i.e,solids,liquids nd gases.
▪ E.g, sound waves, vibrations in a spring.
6.Given below are some examples of wave motion. State in each case if the
wave motion is transverse, longitudinal or a combination of both:
(a)Motion of a kink(particle) in a longitudinal spring produced
by displacing one end of the spring sideways.
(b)Waves produced in a cylinder containing a liquid by moving
its piston back and forth.
(c) Waves produced by a motorboat sailing in water.
(d) Ultrasonic waves in air produced by a vibrating quartz crystal.
(e) The waves in an ocean.
Answer:- (a) Transverse and longitudinal
(b) Longitudinal
(c) Transverse and longitudinal
(d) Longitudinal
(e) Transverse and longitudinal
7.What is a travelling wave or progressive wave?
A wave, transverse or longitudinal, is said to be travelling or progressive if
it travels from one point of the medium to another.

8.Write the displacement relation for a progressive wave travelling along

the positive direction of the x-axis and explain the terms.
y (x, t ) = a sin (kx – ωt + 𝛟)
y (x, t ) = displacement
a=amplitude
(kx – ωt + ϕ) =phase,
k=wave number or propagation constant
ω=angular frequency
Φ =initial phase angle or phase constant

9.Write the displacement relation for a progressive wave travelling along

the negative direction of the x-axis
y (x, t ) = a sin (kx +ωt + 𝛟)
10.Write the equation for propagation constant or angular wave number
𝟐𝝅
k=
𝝀
Its SI unit is radian per metre or rad 𝑚−1
11.Write the equation for angular frequency
𝟐𝛑
ω = = 𝟐𝛑𝝂
𝐓
Its SI unit is rad s−1

12.A wave travelling along a string is described by,

y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x – 3.0 t), in which the numerical constants are in
SI units (0.005 m, 80.0 rad 𝑚−1 , and 3.0 rad 𝑠 −1 ). Calculate
(a) the amplitude,
(b) the wavelength,
(c) the period and frequency of the wave.
(d) Calculate the displacement y of the wave at a distance
x = 30.0 cm and time t = 20 s ?
Answer
y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x – 3.0 t)
The general expression for a travelling wave is
y (x,t ) = a sin (kx – ωt + ϕ)
Comparing these equations
(a) Amplitude , a=0.005m

(b) k=80 rad 𝑚−1

2𝜋
but , k=
𝜆
2𝜋
= 80
𝜆
2𝜋
𝜆 = =0.0785 m
80
𝜆 = 7.85 𝑐𝑚

(c) ω=3
2𝜋
but, ω =
𝑇
2𝜋
=3
𝑇
2𝜋
𝑇 = = 2.09 s
3
Frequency, 𝜈 = 1/T
=1/2.09 = 0.48 Hz

(d) y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x – 3.0 t)

x = 30.0 cm =0.3m
t = 20 s
y(x, t) = 0.005 sin (80.0 x 0.3 – 3.0 x20)
= (0.005 m) sin (–36 )
= 5 mm

12.Derive the expression for speed of a travelling wave

Consider a wave propagating in positive x direction with initial phase
ϕ =0
y (x, t ) = a sin (kx – ωt )
Here, (kx – ωt ) = constant
 𝑑
(kx – ωt ) = 0
𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑡
k −ω =0
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑑𝑥 ω
=
𝑑𝑡 𝑘
𝛚
v=
𝒌
2𝜋𝜈
v= 2𝜋
𝜆
v = 𝝂𝝀
13.Write the expression for speed of a transverse wave on stretched string
𝑇
v=√
μ
𝑚
μ - linear mass density or mass per unit length, μ=
𝑙
T-Tension on the string.

14.A steel wire 0.72 m long has a mass of 5.0 ×𝟏𝟎−𝟑 kg. If the wire is under
a tension of 60 N. What is the speed of transverse waves on the wire ?
𝑇
v=√
μ
𝑀 5.0 ×10−3
μ= = = 6.9 ×10−3 kg 𝑚−1
𝑙 0.72
T = 60 N
60
v=√
6.9 ×10−3
−1
v= 93 m 𝑠
15.Asteel wire has a length of 12m and a mass of 2.1 kg. What is the
tension in the wire if the speed of transverse wave on the on the wire is
343ms-1
𝑇
v=√
μ
𝑇
v2 =
μ
T= v2 μ
𝑀
T= v2 x
𝑙
2.1
T = 3432 x =20588.56 N =2.06 104N
12
16.Write the expression for speed of a transverse wave on stretched
string.
𝑻 𝑚
v=√ μ = linear mass density or mass per unit length= 𝑙
𝛍
T=tension on string
17.Write the expression for speed of longitudinal wave in a fluid
𝑩
v=√ B= the bulk modulus of medium
𝛒
ρ = the density of the medium
18.Write the expression for speed of a longitudinal wave in a solid bar
𝒀
v=√ Y =Young’s modulus
𝛒
ρ=density of the medium,
19.Write Newtons Formula for speed of a longitudinal wave in an ideal gas
𝑷
v=√ P= Pressure of gas
𝛒
ρ = density of gas
20. Write Laplace correction to Newton’s formula for speed of a
longitudinal wave in an ideal gas
𝜸𝐏
v=√ P= Pressure of gas
𝛒
ρ = density of gas
𝐶
γ= 𝑃
𝐶𝑉
21.Derive Newtons Formula for speed of a longitudinal wave in an ideal
gas
𝑩
v=√
𝛒
Newton assumed that, the pressure variations in a medium during
propagation of sound are isothermal.
For isothermal process, PV = constant
VΔP + PΔV = 0
VΔP =- PΔV
−VΔP
=P
ΔV
B =P
𝑷
v=√
𝛒
22.Derive Laplace correction to Newton’s formula for speed of a
longitudinal wave in an ideal gas.
𝐵
v=√
ρ
Laplace found that the pressure variations in a medium during
propagation of sound are adiabatic and not isothermal.
For adiabatic process, P𝑉 𝛾 = constant
Δ P𝑉 𝛾 =0
P𝛾𝑉 𝛾−1 ΔV + 𝑉 𝛾 Δ P =0
P 𝛾𝑉 𝛾−1 ΔV =− 𝑉 𝛾 Δ P
−𝑉 𝛾 ΔP
𝛾P=
𝑉 𝛾−1 ΔV
−VΔP
𝛾P= =B
ΔV
B=𝛾P
𝜸𝐏
v=√
𝛒
23.The speed of sound in air at STP = ---------------
331.3 m 𝑠 −1
24.A progressive gets reflected at a rigid boundary . Write the
displacement relation for incident wave and reflected wave.
Incident wave, 𝑦𝑖 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt)
Reflected wave, 𝑦𝑟 (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt + π)
▪ For reflection at a rigid boundary ,the reflected wave will have a
phase reversal i.e, a phase difference of π radian or 1800 .
▪ For reflection at a rigid boundary ,the displacement at the boundary
is zero
25.A progressive gets reflected at a open boundary . Write the
displacement relation for incident wave and reflected wave.
Incident wave, 𝑦𝑖 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt)
Reflected wave, 𝑦𝑟 (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt).
▪ The reflected wave will have same sign (no phase reversal) and
amplitude as the incident wave.
▪ There will be maximum displacement at the boundary( twice the
amplitude of either of the pulses)
26.What are standing waves?
The interference of two identical waves moving in opposite directions
produces standing waves.
27.Draw standing waves in a stretched string and mark nodes and
antinodes.

28.Obtain the expression for a standing wave and find the condition for
nodes and antinodes.
Wave travelling in +ve x-axis, 𝑦1 (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt)
Wave travelling in -ve x-axis , 𝑦2 (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt)
When they superpose, y (x, t) = 𝑦1 (x, t) + 𝑦2 (x, t)
y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt) + a sin (kx + ωt)
y (x, t) = (2a sin kx) cos ωt
Amplitude of wave , A= 2a sin kx.

Condition for Nodes

The positions of zero amplitude in a staning wave are called nodes.
2a sin kx =0
sin kx =0
kx = nπ, for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..
2π
But k =
λ
2π
x = nπ
λ
𝛌
x=𝒏 , for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..
𝟐

Condition for Antinodes

The positions of maximum amplitude are called antinodes.
2a sin kx =maximum
sin kx =±1
1
kx = (n + ) π, for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..
2
2π
but ,k =
λ
2π 1
x = (n + ) π
λ 2
𝟏 𝛌
x = (n + ) , for n = 0, 1, 2, 3, …..
𝟐 𝟐
29.Draw the different modes of standing waves produced in a stretched
string fixed at both the ends. Also obtain the frequencies of harmonics .
(or) Prove that the frquencies produced in a stretched string fixed at both
ends are in the ratio 𝟏: 𝟐: 𝟑
Fundamental mode or the first harmonic
The oscillation mode with n=1 , the lowest frequency is called the
fundamental mode or the first harmonic.

𝜆
L= 1
2
𝜆1 = 2L
But v=𝜈λ
v
. 𝜈=
𝜆
v
Frequency, 𝜈1 =
𝜆1
v
𝜈1 = ----------(1)
2L
The second harmonic
The second harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2.

𝜆
L = 2 2 =𝜆2
2
𝜆2 = L
v
Frequency, 𝜈2 =
𝜆2
v
𝜈2 =
L
v
𝜈2 = 2 -------------(2)
2L
𝜈2 = 2𝜈1
The Third Harmonic
The third harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 3.

𝜆3
L=3
2
2𝐿
𝜆3 =
3
v
Frequency, 𝜈3 =
𝜆3
v
𝜈3 = 2𝐿
3
v
𝜈3 = 3 --------------(3)
2L

𝜈3 = 3𝑣1
and so on
𝜈1 : 𝜈2 : 𝜈3 = 1: 2: 3
Thus all harmonics are possible in a stretched string fixed at both the ends.
30.Draw the different modes of standing waves produced in a closed pipe.
Also obtain the frequencies of harmonics .
(or) Prove that the frquencies produced in a closed pipe are in the ratio
𝟏: 𝟑: 𝟓 (or) Show that only odd harmonics are possible in a closed pipe.
Eg: Resonance Column(Air columns such as glass tubes partially filled
with water) .
Fundamental mode or the first harmonic
The oscillation mode with n=0 , fundamental mode or the first harmonic.
𝜆
L= 1
4

𝜆1 = 4L
v
Frequency, 𝜈1 =
𝜆1
v
𝜈1 = ------------(1)
4L

The Third Harmonic

The Third harmonic is the oscillation modewith n=1
𝜆
L=3 3
4
4𝐿
𝜆3 =
3
v
Frequency, 𝜈3 =
𝜆3
v
𝜈3 = 4𝐿
3
v
𝜈3 = 3 --------------(2)
4L
𝜈3 = 3𝜈1
The Fifth Harmonic
The Fifth harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2
𝜆
L=5 4
4
4𝐿
𝜆4 =
5
v
Frequency, 𝜈5 =
𝜆5
v
𝜈5 = 4𝐿
5
v
𝜈5 = 5 -------------(3)
4L
𝜈5 = 5𝜈1
𝜈1 : 𝜈3 : 𝜈5 = 1: 3: 5
Thus only odd harmonics are possible in a closed pipe.
31.Draw the different modes of standing waves produced in an open pipe.
Also obtain the frequencies of harmonics .
(or) Prove that the frquencies produced in an open pipe are in the ratio
𝟏: 𝟐: 𝟑
(or) Show that all harmonics are possible in an open pipe.
Example for open pipe -Flute
Fundamental Mode or The First Harmonic
The oscillation mode with n=1 , the lowest frequency is called the
fundamental mode or the first harmonic.

𝜆
L= 1
2
𝜆1 = 2L
v
Frequency, 𝜈1 =
𝜆1
v
𝜈1 = ------------(1)
2L

The Second Harmonic

The second harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2.
𝜆
L=2 2
2
𝜆2 = L
v
Frequency, 𝜈2 =
𝜆2
v
𝜈2 =
L
v
𝜈2 = 2 ------------(2)
2L
𝜈2 = 2𝜈1
The Third Harmonic
The third harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 3.
𝜆3
L=3
2
2𝐿
𝜆3 =
3
v
Frequency, 𝜈3 =
𝜆3
v
𝜈3 = 2𝐿
3
v
𝜈3 = 3 ------------(3)
2L
𝜈3 = 3𝜈1
𝜈1 : 𝜈2 : 𝜈3 = 1: 2: 3
Thus all harmonics are possible in an open pipe.
32.Why open pipes are preferred over closed pipes in musical
instruments?
All harmonics are possible in an open pipe, but in a cloed pipe only odd
harmonics are possible.
So open pipes are preferred over closed pipes in musical instruments.
33.Show that the frequency of fundamental mode(first harmonic) of an
open pipe is twice that of a closed pipe.
Fundamental frequency of open pipe

𝜆
L= 1
2
𝜆1 = 2L
v
Frequency, 𝜈1 =
𝜆1
v
𝜈1 = ------------(1)
2L

Fundamental frequency for closed pipe,

The oscillation mode with n=0 , fundamental mode or the first harmonic.

𝜆1
L=
4

𝜆1 = 4L
v
Frequency, 𝜈1 =
𝜆1
v
𝜈1 = ------------(2)
4L

From eq (1) and (2),Fundamental frequency of open pipe is twice that of a

closed pipe.

34.What are beats?

The waxing and waning (periodinc wavering) of sound intensity when
two waves of nearly same frequencies and amplitudes travelling in the
same direction, are superimposed on each other is called beats.
If 𝑣1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑣2 are the frequencies of superposing waves, the beat frequency
𝝂𝒃𝒆𝒂𝒕 = 𝝂𝟏 − 𝝂𝟐

Seema Elizabeth
HSST Physics
MARM Govt HSS Santhipuram
Thrissur